Dell Openmanage Deployment Toolkit Version 3 0 Quick Reference Guide 3.0 Command Line Interface

2014-11-13

: Dell Dell-Openmanage-Deployment-Toolkit-Version-3-0-Quick-Reference-Guide-117732 dell-openmanage-deployment-toolkit-version-3-0-quick-reference-guide-117732 dell pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 348 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

www.dell.com | support.dell.com
Dell™ OpenManage™
Deployment Toolkit Version
Command Line Interface
Reference Guide
Notes and Cautions
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of
your computer.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates potential damage to hardware or loss of data if
instructions are not followed.
____________________
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
© 2009 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc.
is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, OpenManage, and PowerEdge are trademarks of
Dell Inc.; Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Vista, and Windows Server are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation; Novell and SUSE are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. in the United States
and other countries; Red Hat and Red Hat Enterprise Linux are registered trademarks of Red Hat, Inc.;
Intel, Pentium, and EtherExpress are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation; UNIX is a registered
trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming
the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and
trade names other than its own.
January 2009
Contents 3
Contents
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
What’s New in This Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Toolkit Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
System Configuration Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
RAID Configuration Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
RAC Configuration Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Disk Partitioning Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Replication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Other Dell Documents You Might Need . . . . . . . . . 13
Obtaining Technical Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2 Command Syntax Overview . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Command Line Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Case Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Command Line Option Delimiters . . . . . . . . . 17
Read and Write Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
File Input and Output Commands . . . . . . . . . 18
Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Help Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Error Checking and Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . 19
4Contents
3SYSCFG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
SYSCFG General Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
SYSCFG for BIOS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Options for BIOS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . 27
SYSCFG for BMC and Remote
Access Controller Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
BMC and Remote Access Controller
Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
SYSCFG for State Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
SYSCFG Options for State Configuration . . . . . . 108
SYSCFG for System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Options for System Configuration . . . . . . . . . 110
SYSCFG for IPv6 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
PCI Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Environment Variable File . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
4 RAIDCFG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Supported RAID Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
RAIDCFG Dependencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
RAIDCFG Options and Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Contents 5
RAID Configuration Utility Options
and Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
General Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Enumerating RAID Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Creating Virtual Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Enumerating Array Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Enumerating Virtual Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Initializing Virtual Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Importing and Clearing
Foreign Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Deleting Virtual Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Assigning and Unassigning
Global Hot Spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Setting Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . 163
RAID Replication Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Miscellaneous Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Quick Reference to RAIDCFG Commands . . . . . . . . 172
5UPINIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Creating a Partition Using UPINIT . . . . . . . . . . . 175
UPINIT Dependencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
UPINIT Options and Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
6 RACADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
RACADM Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
6Contents
RAC Configuration Utility Options,
Subcommands, and Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
racadm Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
config/getconfig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
getconfig Subcommand Description . . . . . . . . 193
fwupdate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Synopsis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Updating the Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
getssninfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
getsysinfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
getraclog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Synopsis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
gettracelog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Synopsis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
racdump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
racreset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
racresetcfg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
setrac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
DRAC Property Database Group
and Object Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Contents 7
A Messages and Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
SYSCFG Error Codes and Messages . . . . . . . . . . 213
Failure Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
UPINIT Common Error Codes and Messages . . . . . . 223
Failure Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
UPINIT Linux-Specific Error Codes
and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
UPINIT Windows PE-Specific
Error Codes and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
RAIDCFG Error Codes and Messages . . . . . . . . . . 225
Failure Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
RACADM Firmware Error Codes and Messages . . . . 239
RACADM Utility Error Codes and Messages . . . . . . 241
B BMC Platform Events Filter
Alert Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
C Sample File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Sample SYSCFG Utility .ini File Format . . . . . . . . . 247
Sample RAIDCFG Utility .ini File Format . . . . . . . . 263
Sample RACADM Utility .ini File Format . . . . . . . . 264
8Contents
D Summary of SYSCFG and
RAIDCFG Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
SYSCFG Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
RAIDCFG Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Introduction 9
Introduction
Dell™ OpenManage™ Deployment Toolkit (DTK) includes a set of utilities
for configuring and deploying Dell PowerEdge™ systems. DTK is designed for
customers who need to build scripted installations in order to deploy large
numbers of systems in a reliable fashion without having to dramatically
change their current deployment processes.
DTK consists of command line utilities to configure various system features,
sample scripts to perform common deployment tasks, and documentation for
each utility. You can use DTK in a Microsoft® Windows® Preinstallation
Environment (Windows PE) or a Linux environment.
What’s New in This Release
Deployment Toolkit version 1.0 was the first release of a Dell-designed and
tested suite of utilities, sample script files, and best practices models to use for
configuring and deploying Dell systems in a customized, predictable, and
unattended manner. DTK versions 1.1, 1.3, and 1.4 included added support and
additional utility options. DTK version 2.0 was the first release with flexibility
to use DTK in either a Windows PE or an embedded Linux environment.
DTK version 3.0 was released to support xx1x systems.
This release of DTK includes adding support for:
• New SYSCFG options for BIOS configuration
• New SYSCFG options for power management configuration
• New SYSCFG options for IPv6 configuration
• New RAIDCFG options
• Support for new Dell systems
NOTE: For the list of Dell systems supported for this version of DTK, see the
readme.txt file in the root folder, or the Dell Systems Software Support Matrix
on the Dell Systems Management Tools and Documentation DVD or on the
Dell Support website at support.dell.com.
10 Introduction
Requirements
For Windows PE, the DTK utilities support Windows PE version 2005 (created
using 32-bit version of Microsoft Windows Server® 2003, Service Pack 1 [SP1])
and Windows PE 2.0 (created using 32-bit version built on the Windows
Vista® kernel).
NOTE: DTK utilities do not support Windows PE created with any 64-bit version of
Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
For embedded Linux, the DTK utilities can be run on Red Hat® Enterprise
Linux® (version 4, update 4) 32-bit.
Toolkit Utilities
Overview
DTK contains utilities that allow you to configure the BIOS, baseboard
management controller (BMC), remote access controller (RAC),
RAID controllers, and hard-drive partitions on supported Dell systems.
Additionally, the utilities can be integrated with the sample files provided
with the toolkit to fully configure one-to-many target systems in a scripted
mass system deployment.
NOTE: In a Linux environment, the DTK utilities do not have a .exe extension.
System Configuration Utility
The SYSCFG utility performs the following tasks:
• Reports and sets BIOS configuration options
• Reports and sets BMC/RAC configuration options
• Reports and sets user-configurable states
• Reports system information, including PCI device detection
RAID Configuration Utility
The RAIDCFG utility reports and sets RAID configuration options.
Introduction 11
RAC Configuration Utility
The RACADM utility reports and sets RAC configuration options for Dell
Remote Access Controller (DRAC) III (Linux only) and DRAC 4.
NOTE: DRAC 5 is configured by SYSCFG.
Disk Partitioning Utility
The UPINIT script creates, formats, and populates a Dell Utility Partition.
Replication
File Format
The -i and -o options use a .ini file format for SYSCFG options. All
name/value entries that follow the [syscfg] section header in the .ini file
belong to the SYSCFG utility. For an example of the syscfg.ini file, see "Sample
SYSCFG Utility .ini File Format."
SYSCFG Replication Rules
Not all BIOS and BMC options can be replicated using a .ini file.
For example, boot sequence and device sequence are only replicated if a
device name list can be supplied. A numerical device list cannot be replicated
since these index values can change from system to system. In addition,
because the service tag information is static, it is not commented out in the
output file or replicated. See the description of each option for further
replication information.
The syscfg.ini file cannot be used across different systems. The file output
operation places system identification information at the beginning of the
[syscfg] section. This information is used to determine if the file can be
accepted as input for a system. The following information is used for
system identification:
• System ID Byte(s)
•System Name
• BIOS Version
If these values do not match the values found on the system, the file input
operation fails.
12 Introduction
The following is the SYSCFG behavior during replication:
• Options not available in SYSCFG are termed invalid options. If SYSCFG
encounters an invalid option in the
syscfg.ini
file, the SYSCFG utility
terminates.
• Unsupported options are options available in SYSCFG but not applicable
on certain systems. If SYSCFG encounters an unsupported option,
SYSCFG logs this option and continues to the next option.
For example, the
virtualization
option is not available on
x
8
xx
series systems.
• Unsupported arguments are arguments valid in SYSCFG but not
applicable on certain systems. If SYSCFG encounters an unsupported
argument, SYSCFG terminates.
For example,
syscfg –-embsataraid=ahci
is not applicable on
some
x
9
xx
series systems.
• SYSCFG logs a message in the log file for each option processed in the
syscfg.ini
file. To generate the log file, use the
logfile
option.
RAID Replication
The RAID replication feature reads the RAID configuration information from
the source system and creates a raid.ini file. This raid.ini file can be applied
on the RAID configurations of the target system. The RAID replication
requires both, the source system and the target system to have similar
RAID controllers.
RACADM Replication
The RACREP.BAT sample script applies RAC configuration options to the
target system based on the configuration information that has been saved in a
configuration file. User input is optional, depending on variables set in the
RACREP.BAT sample script. This script uses the RACADM.EXE utility to
configure the RAC in the target system using the RAC configuration file,
raccfg.ini. The raccfg.ini configuration file is passed as the first parameter to
the RACREP.BAT script. If this parameter is not passed, the default variable
values used in this script are set in the TKENVSET.BAT scripts. An optional
second parameter can be passed to this file, which specifies the IP address
used in configuring the RAC. The raccfg.ini file is generated with the
RACCAP.BAT sample script.
Introduction 13
Other Dell Documents You Might Need
Besides this Command Line Interface Reference Guide, you can find the
following guides on the Dell OpenManage documentation page of the Dell
Support website at support.dell.com or on the Dell Systems Management Tools
and Documentation DVD.
• The
Dell OpenManage Deployment Toolkit User's Guide
provides general,
best practices procedures that focus on the basic tasks for successful
deployment of Dell systems.
• The
Dell Systems Software Support Matrix
provides information about the
various Dell systems, the operating systems supported by these systems,
and the Dell OpenManage components that can be installed on
these systems.
• The
Dell OpenManage Installation and Security User's Guide
provides
additional information about performing an unattended installation of
Dell OpenManage
Server Administrator on systems running supported
Windows, Red Hat Enterprise Linux, and SUSE
®
Linux Enterprise Server
operating systems.
• The
Dell OpenManage Server Administrator User's Guide
provides
information on using Server Administrator on supported operating
systems.
• The
Dell OpenManage Server Administrator Compatibility Guide
provides
compatibility information about Server Administrator installation and
operation on various hardware platforms (or systems) running supported
Windows, Red Hat Enterprise Linux, and SUSE Linux Enterprise Server
operating systems.
• The
Dell Update Packages User's Guide
provides information about
obtaining and using Dell Update Packages as part of your system
update strategy.
Additionally, the Deployment Toolkit readme.txt file, which is available as
part of the DTK download and on the Dell Support website at
support.dell.com, provides the latest available information about the
installation and operation of the DTK components.
14 Introduction
Obtaining Technical Assistance
If at any time you do not understand a procedure described in this guide or if
your product does not perform as expected, help tools are available to assist
you. For more information about these help tools, see "Getting Help" in your
system's Hardware Owner's Manual.
Additionally, Dell Enterprise Training and Certification is available;
see www.dell.com/training for more information. This service may not be
offered in all locations.
Command Syntax Overview 15
Command Syntax Overview
Syntax refers to the way a command and its parameters are entered.
Dell™ OpenManage™ Deployment Toolkit (DTK) Command Line Interface
(CLI) commands can be arranged in any order in a command line instance as
long as they conform to the basic command line syntax.
Command Line Syntax
The general usage models of the DTK utilities are as follows:
•SYSCFG
syscfg option1 [arg1] ... option
X
[arg
X
]
OR
syscfg bmcoption1 bmcsuboption1
[arg1]...bmcsuboption
X
[arg
X
]
• RAIDCFG
raidcfg [mandatory options] <optional arguments>
•RACADM
racadm <
options
> <
subcommand
> <
subcommand_options
>
•UPINIT
For WinPE:upinit --disk=0 --size=32 --file=
t:\upimage.bin
For Linux:upinit --disk=/dev/sda --size=32 --file=
/tmp/upimage.bin
The DTK command line switches, configuration file formatting, and error
reporting follow similar style and behavior. However, individual DTK utilities
can sometimes differ from one another in significant ways. You should
familiarize yourself with the command line syntax and utility-specific options
and arguments for each utility before using DTK.
NOTE: Some of the command line options in DTK are followed by an asterisk.
Such options are used for reporting purposes only.
16 Command Syntax Overview
Table 2-1 lists the generic command line characters and arguments present in
the command line options with a short description of these characters.
Table 2-1. Command Line Syntax
Element Description
- Single-character options are prefixed with a preceding hyphen (-).
NOTE: This delimiter is not applicable to Baseboard Management
Controller (BMC) suboptions.
-- Multi-character options are prefixed with two (2) preceding hyphens
(--).
utilname Generic designation for a DTK utility name.
o Generic single-character designation for an option.
optionXGeneric multi-character designation for a utility name, where X can
be used to distinguish multiple options used in the same command
line instance.
argXGeneric designation for an argument, where X can be used to distinguish
multiple arguments used in the same command line instance.
[mandatory
option]
Generic designation for a mandatory argument.
<optional
argument>
Generic designation for an optional argument.
<string> Generic designation for a string.
<filename> Generic designation for a filename.
[ ] Indicates a component of the command line. Enter only the
information within the brackets, not the brackets themselves.
... Indicates that the previous argument can be repeated several times in
a command. Enter only the information, not the ellipsis (...) itself.
| Separates two mutually exclusive choices in a syntax line. For
example:
usb: Turns the usb controller on or off.
Argument: enable | disable | legacy
Enter only one choice: --usb=enable, --usb=disable, or
--usb=legacy
.
Command Syntax Overview 17
Case Sensitivity
• Command line options, pre-defined and user-defined arguments, and
filenames given as arguments are all case sensitive.
• Unless specified otherwise, enter all commands, options, arguments, and
command line switches in lowercase letters.
Command Line Option Delimiters
• Single-character options are
prefixed
with a preceding hyphen (-).
• Multi-character options are
prefixed
with two (2) preceding hyphens (--).
Example: utilname -o --option
Table 2-2 lists some examples of valid and invalid DTK command lines.
NOTE: Options that specify report or set actions should not be mixed in a command
line instance.
Table 2-2. DTK Command Line Examples
Valid/
Invalid
DTK Command Line Example
valid syscfg --option1
--option2
syscfg --asset --floppy
invalid syscfg --option1=argument
--option2 --option3
syscfg --asset=1750
--floppy --bootseq
valid syscfg -o=filename
--option1
--option2
syscfg -o=/tmp/myfile.txt
--floppy
--bootseq
valid syscfg -l=filename
--option1
--option2
syscfg -l=
/tmp/myfile.txt --floppy
--bootseq
valid syscfg -i=filename
--option1
--option2
syscfg -i=
/tmp/myfile.txt --floppy
--bootseq
valid syscfg --option=
argument bmcoption
--option1=argument
syscfg --embnic=on
pcp --hostname=webserver
18 Command Syntax Overview
NOTE: Example 2 is invalid because the report and set actions are used in the
same command line.
NOTE: Examples 3, 4, and 5 are valid because the aliases use neither report nor set
actions.
Read and Write Commands
Options can report a certain value or set of values based on the presence of an
argument. These read or write actions are implied in the DTK command line
arguments. The get, read, set, or write commands, for example, are not required.
NOTE: Options that specify read or write actions should not be mixed in a
command line instance.
File Input and Output Commands
• File input is specified by the
-i
<
filename
> command,
where <
filename
> is the name of the input file.
• File output is specified by the
-o
<
filename
> command,
where <
filename
> is the name of the output file.
Log Files
The -l <
filename
> or --logfile <
filename
> option records
information output on the command line to the specified log file. Each new
line of output is preceded by a time stamp.
If the log file already exists, information is appended to the file. This allows
multiple tools to use the same log file to record information. This option
should be used instead of redirection to record a utility’s output since time
data can assist with task diagnosis.
Table 2-3. Read and Write Command Examples
Valid/Invalid DTK Command Line Example
valid syscfg --option1 --option2
valid syscfg --option1=arg --option2=arg
invalid syscfg --option1=arg --option2
Command Syntax Overview 19
The log duplicates all standard output and error information to the specified
file. Each log file begins with a time stamp and utility name. For example,
YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
<
utilname
> - <
output text
>.
The following is an example of the logging behavior:
2003/11/28 10:23:17 syscfg -
option1
=on
2003/11/28 10:23:17 syscfg -
option2
=on
2003/11/28 10:23:17 syscfg -
option3
=off
NOTE: The log files may contain sensitive information such as passwords and
authentication information. To protect such information, it is recommended that
only the administrator access the log files.
Help Option
The -h and --help options display general usage information for the utility.
If the argument matches a valid option, that option's usage information is
displayed. If the option has arguments, the arguments are displayed,
separated by a | character. If the argument does not match a valid option,
a usage error is given (and usage information is displayed). This option
cannot be replicated.
Error Checking and Error Messages
The DTK utilities check your commands for correct syntax when you enter
them. When a command is executed successfully, a message displays stating
that your command has been successful. Unrecognized or invalid options and
arguments result in a usage error that displays the DTK utility name and
version along with a short message. For information about the error messages,
see "Messages and Codes."
20 Command Syntax Overview
SYSCFG 21
SYSCFG
This section documents the Deployment Toolkit (DTK) system
configuration utility. It describes the command line parameters,
configuration file format, and individual executables used to configure server
BIOS and baseboard management controller (BMC) settings, DTK state
settings, and system information including PCI device detection.
Features
The SYSCFG utility has the following general features:
• Displays help and usage information
• Outputs configuration options to a file or screen
• Reads configuration options from a file or CLI parameters
• Configures BMC/remote access controller (RAC) users, local area network
(LAN) channel and serial channel settings, BMC/RAC platform event
filter (PEF) settings, and BMC/RAC serial-over-LAN (SOL) settings
• Configures the nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) and power button
• Reports the BMC/RAC firmware version, BMC/RAC device global unique
identifier (GUID), and BMC/RAC LAN channel and serial channel
information
• Reports BMC/RAC session information
• Clears BMC/RAC system event log (SEL)
• Restores BMC/RAC factory defaults
• Records and reports the state data value
• Displays system configuration information
• Returns specific error codes and messages
• Logs activity to a given filename
• Configures the BIOS features
NOTE: In Microsoft® Windows® Preinstallation Environment (Windows PE),
the SYSCFG utility is located at \dell\toolkit\tools. In Linux, you can find it in
/opt/dell/toolkit/bin.
22 SYSCFG
SYSCFG General Options
NOTE: Some of the options in SYSCFG are followed by an asterisk. These commands
do not accept any suboptions or arguments. The values associated with these
commands are those that are reported by the BIOS. These values cannot be modified.
Table 3-1 lists the SYSCFG general options.
Table 3-1. SYSCFG General Options
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description
No
option
NA NA If an option is not given, the SYSCFG utility outputs
usage information. The usage information is
displayed in the format shown below.
Example:
A:>syscfg
syscfg version 1.X.123 A06
© 2005 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Usage: syscfg --option[=argument]
or
syscfg --option [argument] or
syscfg option --suboption
[=suboptionargument]
For more information about a
particular command, use the option
'-h' followed by the command name.
Example: syscfg -h bmcversion.
Options without preceding
delimiters have suboptions.
Example: syscfg lancfgparams
Options with preceding delimiters
do not have suboptions.
Example: syscfg --powerbutton
option1 option4 option7
option2 option5 option8
option3 option6 option9
SYSCFG 23
--envar valid
filename
valid path
media
should be
writable
When used with the –s option, this option stores
the environment variable data to a file. This file
can be called from other scripts to set the
environment variable. The value of <filename>
need not be specified if the DTKENVSCR
environment variable is set to a valid filename.
In this case, the filename pointed to by
DTKENVSCR is used to store the environment
variable data.
Example:
syscfg --mem -s=temp --envar=
z:\scripts\file.bat
When used without the -s option, --envar takes
the default variable.
Linux Example:
syscfg --svctag --envar=
/tmp/myvars.txt
svctag = 2G8LC1S
syscfg_var = ’2G8LC1S’
source /tmp/myvars.txt
Windows PE Example:
syscfg --svctag --envar=
i:\myvars.bat
svctag = 2G8LC1S
syscfg_var = ’2G8LC1S’
call i:\myvars.bat
Table 3-1. SYSCFG General Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description
24 SYSCFG
-h
or
--help
NA none
or
<valid
option
name>
Without an argument, this option displays general
usage information for the utility. If the argument
matches a valid option, that option's usage
information is displayed. If the option has
arguments, the arguments are displayed, separated
by a | character. If the option has suboptions, all
suboptions, valid arguments, and a description are
listed. If the argument does not match a valid
option, a usage error is given (and usage
information is displayed). This option cannot be
replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg -h lanchannelaccess
lanchannelaccess: Reports LAN
channel access information.
Suboptions:
pefalerting: Enable or disable PEF
(Platform Event Filter) alerting.
Arguments: enable | disable
ipmioverlan: Enable or disable IPMI
over LAN access.
Arguments: disable | alwaysavail
channelprivlmt: Sets the maximum
privilege level that can be
accepted on the LAN channel.
Arguments: user | operator |
administrator
Table 3-1. SYSCFG General Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description
SYSCFG 25
-i
or
--infile
NA <filename> This option directs the SYSCFG utility to take
input from a .ini file. The utility searches the file
for a section heading identical to the utility name.
An error is returned if the file or section is not
found. If the section is found, each name/value
pair is applied to the system. The names must
match a valid option, and the arguments must be
in the proper format for the option. If an option is
not available on a system and it is specified in a
file, the utility ignores the option. If any errors are
found in the format of the names or values, an
error is returned and the options are not applied to
the system. If this option is used with other
function command options, they are applied in
the order in which they appear on the command
line, overriding any previous commands.
This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg -i
filename
.ini
-l
or
--logfile
NA <filename> This option logs the command line output to a
time-stamped file. The utility either appends the
information to an existing log file or creates a new
file. The log file contains the same information as
the standard output, plus timestamp information.
Users should use this option instead of redirection
for task diagnosis. This option can be replicated.
See "Log Files" for more information.
Example:
A:>syscfg -l
logfile
Table 3-1. SYSCFG General Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description
26 SYSCFG
-o
or
--outfile-
o or --
outfile
NA <filename> This option outputs all replicable options to the
specified filename. The format of the output is in
a .ini format, with the utility name as the section
header. If a file with the same name already exists,
the information is appended to the file. If this
option is used with other function commands, the
commands are applied in the order in which they
appear. This option captures replicable BMC and
BIOS options.
Example:
A:>syscfg -o
filename.ini
-s NA <string> This option prints the variable name and the value
assigned to it to the console. This option when
used with --envar, picks up the environment
variable data and stores it in a file. This file can be
called from a script. See "--envar" for more
information.
Example:
A:>syscfg -s ENVNAME --svctag
svctag=SERVICE
ENVNAME=SERVICE
--
version*
This option displays the version information,
current time, and date for the utility. This option
cannot be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --version
syscfg version 1.X.XX AXX
© 2005 Dell Inc. All rights
reserved.
NOTE: The asterisk is not part of the command
syntax.
Table 3-1. SYSCFG General Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description
SYSCFG 27
SYSCFG for BIOS Configuration
SYSCFG uses BIOS interfaces to manipulate boot order and BIOS settings.
It configures all options available on the BIOS setup screen, including boot
order, embedded device configuration, and asset tag management.
Options for BIOS Configuration
Table 3-2 documents valid options and arguments along with a description of
their expected behavior. Options and arguments are case sensitive. All options
and pre-defined arguments are lowercase unless stated otherwise.
NOTE: Some of the following options or arguments might not be available on all
systems due to the BIOS version or hardware feature set. Running SYSCFG without
arguments displays only those options that are valid for your system.
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration
Option Valid Arguments Description
--acpower on, off, last This option sets the behavior for the system after
AC power is lost. This option specifies how the
system responds to the restoration of AC power
and is particularly useful in systems that are turned
off using a power strip. When set to on, the system
turns on after AC is restored. When set to off, the
system does not turn on after AC is restored.
When set to last, the system turns on if the
system was on when AC power was lost; if the
system was off when AC power was lost, the
system remains off when power is restored.
This option is available on all supported systems.
This value can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --acpower=on
acpower=on
28 SYSCFG
--
adjcacheprefetch
enable, disable When this option is set to enabled, the processor
fetches the cache line containing the currently
requested data, and prefetches the following
cache line.
When this option is set to disabled, the processor
fetches only the cache line containing the
currently requested data.
Example:
A:>syscfg --adjcacheprefetch=
enable
adjcacheprefetch=enable
--asset <string> This option reports or sets the customer-
programmable asset tag number for a system.
The maximum length of an asset tag is
10 characters. Asset tag values cannot contain any
spaces. This option is available on all supported
systems. This value can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --asset=
ASSETTAG
asset=
ASSETTAG
--assignintr standard,
distributed
This option controls the interrupt assignment of
PCI devices in the system. This option is set to
standard by default, causing standard interrupt
routing that uses interrupt A, B, C, D for all PCIe
devices. When set to distributed, the interrupt
routing is swizzled at the MCH root ports to
minimize sharing of interrupts across all PCIe
(and PCI-X in the Programmable Interrupt
Controller (PIC) mode) devices.
Example:
A:>syscfg --assignintr=standard
assignintr=standard
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 29
--bezelir enable, disable This option enables or disables the ESM to
monitor and log front bezel intrusion conditions.
Example:
A:>syscfg --bezelir=enable
bezelir=enable
--bootmode uefi, bios This option enables booting to Unified
Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) -capable
operating systems or ensures compatibility with
operating systems that do not support UEFI.
Example:
A:>syscfg --bootmode=uefi
bootmode=uefi
NOTE: This option is available only on xx1x
systems.
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
30 SYSCFG
--bootseq numerical list,
separated by
commas
or
list of device
names,
separated by
commas
This option sets the boot order for a system.
Without an argument, this option prints the boot
order list. The argument must be formatted as a
comma-separated numerical list with no spaces.
The list must be within the bounds of the current
boot list, i.e. the low and high numbers must
match, and the same number of entries must be
supplied. This option is available on all supported
systems. Systems that use a numerical list for
boot order cannot be replicated.
Some systems also allow the boot order to be
expressed as a list of device names. Device names
are formatted as a name.location.instance string,
where name is the name of the device, location is
either slot or embedded (emb), and instance is
the numerical position of the device. Some device
name examples are shown below. Systems that
support a list of device names for boot order can
be replicated.
Numerical Lists Examples
A:>syscfg --bootseq=2,3,4,5,1,6
The following devices are set in
the boot sequence:
Device 2:* usbcdrom.slot.1 - USB
CD-ROM device
Device 3:* virtualcd.slot.1 –
VIRTUAL CDROM
Device 4:* hdd.emb.0 - Hard drive
C:
Device 5:* nic.emb.1 - MBA
v2.5.12 Slot 0500
Device 1:* virtualfloppy.slot.1 -
VIRTUAL FLOPPY
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 31
Device 6:* usbfloppy.slot.1 - USB
Floppy device
NOTE: The asterisk indicates that the device is
enabled in the BIOS.
Device Name Examples
Example of device names:
nic.slot.1 (network adapter 1 in PCI slot)
nic.emb.1 (network adapter 1 on system
board)
hdd.emb.0 (hard drive C:)
cdrom.emb.0 (CD drive)
Device Name Lists Examples
Example 1:
#syscfg --bootseq
The following devices are set in
the boot sequence:
Device 2:* cdrom.emb.0 - IDE CD-
ROM device
Device 3:* hdd.emb.0 - Hard drive
C:
Device 5:* virtual.slot.1 -
VIRTUALCDROM DRIVE
Device 1:* floppy.emb.0 - Diskette
drive A:
Device 6:* virtual.slot.2 -
VIRTUALFLOPPY DRIVE
Device 4:* nic.emb.1 - IBA GE Slot
0638 v1226
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
32 SYSCFG
Example 2:
#syscfg --bootseq=
nic.emb.1,virtual.slot.1
The following devices are set in
the boot sequence:
Device 4:* nic.emb.1 - IBA GE Slot
0638 v1226
Device 6:* virtual.slot.2 -
VIRTUALFLOPPY DRIVE
Device 2:* cdrom.emb.0 - IDE CD-
ROM device
Device 3:* hdd.emb.0 - Hard drive
C:
Device 5:* virtual.slot.1 -
VIRTUALCDROM DRIVE
Device 1:* floppy.emb.0 - Diskette
drive A:
NOTE: The asterisk indicates that the device is
enabled in the BIOS.
--bootseqretry enable, disable This option enables or disables the boot sequence
retry feature. When set to enable, the system will
re-attempt to set the boot order after a 30 seconds
timeout if the last boot attempt has failed.
This option can be replicated.
A:>syscfg --bootseqretry=enable
bootseqretry=enable
--cmosdefaults enable, disable This option enables or disables the CMOS
defaults to be on or off in the next boot.
A:>syscfg --cmosdefaults=enable
cmosdefaults=enable
NOTE: This option is available only on x9xx, xx0x,
and xx1x systems.
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 33
--conboot enable, disable This option configures or reports whether console
redirection occurs after boot. This option is
available on all supported systems that support
console redirection. This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --conboot=enable
conboot=enable
--conred serial1, serial2,
off, bmcsol,
mmb
This option configures or reports the
communication port for console redirection.
If this option is set to a serial port, then the serial
port option is not available. See the descriptions
for --serial1 and --serial2. If only one serial port is
present on a system, the serial2 argument is not
available. This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --conred=serial1
conred=serial1
--conterm vt100, ansi This option configures or reports the terminal
type for console redirection. This option is
available on all supported systems that support
console redirection. This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --conterm=vt100
conterm=vt100
--cpucore 1, 2, 4 This option allows the user to control the number
of enabled cores in each processor. The default
value is set to the maximum number of cores
per processor.
Example:
A:>syscfg --cpucore=1
cpucore=1
NOTE: This option is available only on x9xx, xx0x,
and xx1x systems.
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
34 SYSCFG
--cpuxdsupport enable, disable This option enables or disables the execute
disable (XD) feature of the CPU.
Example:
A:>syscfg --cpuxdsupport=enable
cpuxdsupport=enable
NOTE: This option is available only on x9xx, xx0x,
and xx1x systems running on Intel® processors.
--cstates enable, disable This option enables or disables the power c states
of the processor.
A:>syscfg --cstates=enable
cstates=enable
NOTE: This option is available only on xx1x
systems.
--dbpm enable, disable This option enables or disables demand-based
power management. This option can be
replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --dbpm=enable
dbpm=enable
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 35
--devseq numerical list,
separated by
commas
or
list of device
names,
separated by
commas
This option sets the hard-drive sequence for a
system. Without an argument, this option
displays the device list. The argument must be
formatted as a comma-separated numerical list of
device index values. The list must be within the
bounds of the current boot list. For example, the
low and high numbers must match. Systems that
use a numerical list for boot order cannot be
replicated. This option is available on all
supported systems.
Some systems allow the boot order to be
expressed as a list of device names. Systems that
support device names also support replication of
the boot order through the output file option.
Device names are formatted as a
name.location.instance string, where name is the
name of the device, location is either slot or
embedded (emb), and instance is the numerical
position of the device. Some device name
examples are shown below. Systems that support a
list of device names for boot order can be
replicated.
numerical list,
separated by
commas
or
list of device
names,
separated by
commas
Example 1:
A:>syscfg --devseq
The following devices are set in
the disk device sequence:
Device 1:* hdd.emb.0 - System BIOS
boot devices
Device 2:* scsiraid.slot.3 - PERC
4/SC Adapter(bus 02 dev 02)
Device 3:* usbkey.slot.0 - Hard-
disk-emulated USB flash drive
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
36 SYSCFG
Example 2:
A:>syscfg --devseq=
hdd.emb.1,scsiraid.emb.1
The following devices are set in
the disk device sequence:Device
1:* hdd.emb.0 - System BIOS boot
devices
Device 2:* scsiraid.emb.1 - AIC-
7899, A:00 Seagate
NOTE: The asterisk indicates that the device is
enabled in the BIOS.
--embhypervisor off, on This option enables or disables the embedded
hypervisor port.
Example:
A:>syscfg --embhypervisor=on
embhypervisor=on
--embideraid on, off This option enables or disables the embedded
IDE RAID controller. This option is only valid for
supported systems that have IDE ROMB.
This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --embideraid=on
embideraid=on
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 37
--embnic1 on, off, onnopxe,
onwithiscsi
This option turns the first embedded NIC on
with PXE on, off, or on without PXE enabled.
This option is only valid for supported systems
that have an NIC. If the NIC is enabled without
PXE, it is not found in the boot order. If the NIC
is turned on with PXE, it is placed at the end of the
boot order. The onnopxe argument is not
supported on all systems.
The onwithiscsi argument enables the embedded
NIC to boot from the iSCSI server. The embnic1
option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --embnic1=onnopxe
embnic1=onnopxe
--embnic2 on, off, onnopxe,
onwithiscsi
This option turns the second embedded NIC on
with PXE enabled, off, or on without PXE
enabled. This option is only valid for supported
systems that have two embedded NICs. If the
second NIC is enabled without PXE, it is not
found in the boot order. If the second NIC is
turned on with PXE, it is placed at the end of the
boot order. The onnopxe argument is not
supported on all systems. This option can be
replicated.
The onwithiscsi argument enables the
embedded NIC to boot from the iSCSI server.
The embnic2 option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --embnic2=onnopxe
embnic2=onnopxe
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
38 SYSCFG
--embnic3 on, off, onnopxe,
onwithiscsi
This option turns the third embedded NIC on
with PXE enabled, off, or on without PXE
enabled. This option is only valid for supported
systems that have three embedded NICs. If the
second NIC is enabled without PXE, it is not
found in the boot order. If the third NIC is turned
on with PXE, it is placed at the end of the boot
order. The onnopxe argument is not supported on
all systems. This option can be replicated.
The onwithiscsi argument enables the
embedded NIC to boot from the iSCSI server.
The embnic3 option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --embnic3=onnopxe
embnic3=onnopxe
--embnic4 on, off, onnopxe,
onwithiscsi
This option turns the fourth embedded NIC on
with PXE enabled, off, or on without PXE
enabled. This option is only valid for supported
systems that have four embedded NICs. If the
fourth NIC is enabled without PXE, it is not
found in the boot order. If the fourth NIC is
turned on with PXE, it is placed at the end of the
boot order. The onnopxe argument is not
supported on all systems. This option can be
replicated.
The onwithiscsi argument enables the
embedded NIC to boot from the iSCSI server.
The embnic4 option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --embnic4=onnopxe
embnic4=onnopxe
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 39
--embnic1nic2 enable, disable This option enables or disables the operating
system interface of the first and second
embedded NIC controllers.
Example:
A:>syscfg --embnic1nic2=enable
--embnic1nic2=enable
NOTE: This option is available only on Dell™
PowerEdge™ 1855, PowerEdge 6850, and xx1x
systems.
--embnic3nic4 enable, disable This option enables or disables the operating
system interface of the third and fourth
embedded NIC controllers.
Example:
A:>syscfg --embnic3nic4=enable
--embnic3nic4=enable
NOTE: This option is available only on xx1x
systems.
--embnics on, off This option enables or disables both embedded
NICs. This option is only present on systems that
do not support the embnic1 and embnic2
options. This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --embnics=on
embnics=on
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
40 SYSCFG
--embnic1pxe enable, disable This option enables or disables PXE on the first
embedded NIC. If PXE is disabled, the first NIC
is not found in the boot order. If PXE is enabled,
the first NIC is placed at the end of the boot
order. This option is only present on systems that
do not support the embnic1 option. This option
can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --embnic1pxe=enable
embnic1pxe=enable
--embnic2pxe enable, disable This option enables or disables PXE on the
second embedded NIC. If PXE is disabled, the
second NIC is not found in the boot order. If PXE
is enabled, the second NIC is placed at the end of
the boot order. This option is only present on
systems that do not support the embnic2 option.
This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --embnic2pxe=disable
embnic2pxe=disable
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 41
--embsataraid off, combined,
ata, raid, qdma
This option configures an embedded SATA RAID
controller. This option can be replicated.
off — disables the embedded SATA RAID
controller.
combined — sets the SATA RAID controller to
combined mode.
ata — sets SATA RAID controller to ATA mode.
raid — sets SATA RAID controller to RAID
mode.
qdma — sets the SATA RAID controller to
support ATAPI devices at transfer rates much
higher than PIO. A device driver must be installed
on your system to use the QDMA mode.
Example:
A:>syscfg --embsataraid=off
embsataraid=off
--embscsi1 on, off This option enables or disables the first
embedded SCSI controller. This option is only
valid for supported systems that have an
embedded SCSI controller. This option can be
replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --embscsi1=on
embscsi1=on
--embscsi2 on, off This option enables or disables the second
embedded SCSI controller. This option is only
valid for supported systems that have an
embedded SCSI controller. This option can be
replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --embscsi2=on
embscsi2=on
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
42 SYSCFG
--embscsiraid raid, off, scsi This option enables or disables the embedded
SCSI RAID controller. This option is only valid
for supported systems that have SCSI ROMB.
Some systems do not support the scsi argument.
This option can be replicated.
CAUTION: If you change the controller from
SCSI to RAID mode, data loss may occur.
Backup any data you need to save before
changing modes.
Example:
A:>syscfg --embscsiraid=raid
embscsiraid=raid
--embscsiraidchb raid, scsi This option sets the second channel on an
embedded RAID controller to SCSI or RAID.
This option is only valid for supported systems
that support RAID/RAID and RAID/SCSI
settings for channels A and B. This option can be
replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --embscsiraidchb=raid
embscsiraidchb=raid
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 43
--extserial com1, com2, rad This option sets the behavior of the external serial
connector. When set to com1, the BIOS maps the
external serial connector to COM port 1.
The com1 setting is the default.
When set to com2, the external serial connector
is routed to the COM2 interface. Terminal escape
sequences can toggle the external connector
between the system (COM2) and the remote
access device.
When set to rad, the external serial connector is
routed to the remote access device interface.
Terminal escape sequences can toggle the
external connector between the system (COM2)
and the remote access device.
This option can be replicated.
NOTE: This option is not supported on PowerEdge
1955 systems.
Example:
A:>syscfg --extserial=com1
extserial=com1
On x9xx systems, the --serialcomm option can be
used with the external serial (--extserial) option
instead of the --conred option.
--embvideoctrl enable, disable This option enables or disables the embedded
video controller.
Example:
A:>syscfg --embvideoctrl=enable
embvideoctrl=enable
NOTE: This option is available only on xx1x
systems.
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
44 SYSCFG
--fiberchannel enable, disable This option enables or disables embedded fiber
channel. This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --fiberchannel=enable
fiberchannel=enable
--floppy auto, off,
readonly
This option sets the diskette drive controller to
auto, off, or read-only. This option is available on
all supported systems that have a supported
diskette drive. This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --floppy=auto
floppy=auto
--fsbr 115200, 57600,
19200, 9600
This option sets the console redirection fail safe
baud rate in bps.
Example:
A:>syscfg --fsbr=9600
fsbr=9600
--hddfailover off, on This option specifies the device in the hard disk
drive sequence menu that has not been
attempted in the boot sequence.When set to on,
all devices are attempted in order. When set to
off, only the first device in the hard disk sequence
is attempted. This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --hddfailover=on
hddfailover=on
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 45
--hwprefetcher enable, disable When set to enable, this option makes the
processor look ahead and see what data might be
needed next. When some data is found, it loads
several steps in advance.
When set to disable, it does not look ahead.
This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --hwprefetcher=enable
hwprefetcher=enable
--idecdrom auto, off This option enables or disables the CD drive.
This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --idecdrom=auto
idecdrom=auto
--idracgui enable, disable Enables and disables the iDRAC GUI.
This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --idracgui=disable
idracgui=disable
--integratedraid enable, disable This option enables or disables the integrated
RAID controller. This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --integratedraid=disable
integratedraid=disable
--integratedsas enable, disable This option enables or disables the integrated
SAS controller. This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --integratedsas=enable
integratedsas=enable
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
46 SYSCFG
--internalusb off, on This option enables or disables all the
user-accessible USB ports. This option can be
replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --internalusb=on
internalusb=on
--ioat enable, disable This option enables or disables the I/O
Acceleration Technology (I/OAT) DMA Engine
option. This option must be enabled only if the
hardware and software support I/OAT on your
system. This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --ioat=enable
ioat=enable
--lcd default, none,
user,
idracipv4address,
idracmacaddress,
ossystemname,
servicetag,
ipv6address,
ambienttemp,
systemwatts
This option determines whether to display the
default string (model name and number) or a
user-defined string on the front-panel LCD.
This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --lcd=default
lcd=default
NOTE: The idracipv4address, idracmacaddress,
ossystemname, servicetag, ipv6address,
ambienttemp, and systemwatts arguments are
available only on xx1x systems.
--lcd1 <string> This option sets the first line of user-defined text
on the system LCD. This option can be
replicated.
NOTE: Before setting user strings for this option,
ensure that --lcd is set to user.
NOTE: If you have a PowerEdge x6xx, x7xx, or x8xx
system, you need to reboot your system for the
settings to take effect.
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 47
--lcd2 <string> This option sets the second line of user-defined
LCD strings.
--logicproc enable, disable This option enables or disables logical processing
for a system. This option is available on all
systems that support logical processing
(Hyperthreading). This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --logicproc=enable
logicproc=enable
--lpt lpt1, lpt2, lpt3,
disable
This option configures or reports the I/O address
of the LPT (parallel) port. This option is available
on all supported systems with an LPT port. This
option is recorded to an output file for replication.
Example:
A:>syscfg --lpt=lpt1
lpt=lpt1
--lptmode ps2, at This option configures or reports the mode of an
LPT (parallel) port. This option is available on all
supported systems with an LPT port. This option
is recorded to an output file for replication.
Example:
A:>syscfg --lptmode=ps2
lptmode=ps2
--memintleave enable, disable This option enables or disables the memory
interleave mode. This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --memintleave=enable
memintleave=enable
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
48 SYSCFG
--
memoperatingm
ode
optimizer,
mirror,
advancedecc
This option selects the memory operating mode.
This feature is active only if a valid memory
configuration is detected.
Example:
A:>syscfg --memoperatingmode=
optimizer
memoperatingmode=optimizer
NOTE: This option is available only on xx1x
systems.
--memremap off, auto This option enables or disables memory
remapping.
A:>syscfg --memremap=off
memintleave=off
--memtest enable, disable This option enables or disables the POST
extended memory test.
Example:
A:>syscfg --memtest=disable
memtest=disable
--mouse off, on This option turns the mouse controller on or off.
This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --mouse=off
mouse=off
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 49
--nextboot valid device
name (from the
--bootseq option
device list)
This option sets the specified device as the first
device in the boot order for the next boot cycle
only. The device must be a device from the
--bootseq option device list. Run the --bootseq
option to see a list of available device names.
See --bootseq for more information. This option
is not replicated.
Example 1:
A:>syscfg --bootseq
Device 1: floppy.emb.0 - Diskette
Drive A:
Device 2: cdrom.emb.0 - CD-ROM
device
Device 3: hdd.emb.0 - Hard Drive
C:
Device 4: nic.emb.1 - Intel Boot
Agent Version 4.0.17
Device 5: nic.emb.2 - Intel Boot
Agent Version 4.0.17
Example 2:
A:>syscfg --nextboot=nic.emb.1
nextboot=nic.emb.1
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
50 SYSCFG
--noraidprompt* NA This option specifies that the BIOS must not
prompt for confirmation when changing the
mode of a RAID controller. This option can
only be used with the --embscsiraid or
--embscsiraidchb options.
Without this option, the user is prompted during
POST to confirm the change of a RAID controller
from RAID(SCSI) to SCSI(RAID). This option is
not replicated.
CAUTION: When changing a RAID
controller from SCSI to RAID or from RAID to
SCSI, data is lost on the affected hard drives.
The warning message for this data is not
displayed if you use the --noraidprompt
option. To avoid data loss, back up any
information on the hard drives before
changing the type of controller used with
the drives.
Example:
A:>syscfg --embscsiraid=raid
--noraidprompt
embscsiraid=raid
NOTE: The asterisk is not part of the command
syntax.
--numlock on, off This option enables or disables the keyboard
number lock during POST. This option is not
replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --numlock=on
numlock=on
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 51
--oldsetuppwd <string> This option is required to set a new setup
password when a setup password is currently set.
The setup password locks the BIOS setup screen.
The argument string supplied to this option is the
current password. If this password is not correct,
the new setup password is not applied to the
system. Generally, passwords are limited to
alphanumeric characters and cannot exceed
32 characters in length. This option is
not replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --setuppwd=
asetuppassword
--oldsetuppwd=
currentpassword
The password has been set. Please
use a warm reboot to apply the
password to the system.
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
52 SYSCFG
--oldsyspwd <string> This option supplies the current system password
for the BIOS. This option is only given when
setting the new system password. If this password
does not match the current system password,
the new password is not applied to the system.
The system password is required when booting
the system. The argument string supplied to this
option will be the password. Generally, passwords
are limited to alphanumeric characters and
cannot exceed 32 characters in length.
This option is not replicated.
Example 1:
A:>syscfg --syspwd=
anotherpassword
--oldsyspwd=
password
The password has been set. Please
use a warm reboot to apply the
password to the system.
Example 2:
A:>syscfg --syspwd=asyspassword
--oldsyspwd=currentpassword
The old password entered is
incorrect. The new password will
not be set. Please try again.
--opticaldrivectrl enable, disable This option enables or disables the optical
CD-ROM controller.
Example:
A:>syscfg --opticaldrivectrl=
enable
opticaldrivectrl=enable
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 53
--osmode enable, disable This option enables or disables operating system
installation mode for installing operating systems.
Enabling this option causes the BIOS to only
report 256 MB to the operating system.
Some operating systems cannot be installed if
a system has more than 2 GB of memory.
This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --osmode=enable
osmode=enable
--
oswatchdogtimer
enable, disable If your system stops responding, the watchdog
timer aids in the recovery of your operating
system. When this option is set to enable, the
operating system is allowed to initialize the timer.
When set to disable (the default), the timer will
have no effect on the system.
Example:
A:>syscfg --oswatchdogtimer=enable
oswatchdogtimer=enable
--ovrwrt* NA This option is only used with the -o option to
cause the output file to be overwritten if a file of
the same name already exists. This option cannot
be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg -o=
filename
.ini --ovrwrt
The file
filename
has been
overwritten.
NOTE: The asterisk is not part of the command
syntax.
power
NOTE: For details about the power suboptions and arguments, see Table 3-4. This option
is available only on xx1x systems.
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
54 SYSCFG
--powerbutton enable, disable This option enables or disables the power button
for a system. This option is recorded to an output
file for replication. This option is available on all
supported systems.
Example:
A:>syscfg --powerbutton=enable
powerbutton=enable
NOTE: The system must be rebooted for BIOS
options to take effect.
--pwdlock lock, unlock This option locks the system password. If the
system password is locked, it can be modified only
through the F2 screen with the setup password.
This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --pwdlock=lock
pwdlock=lock
--redmem off, spare,
mirror, raid
This option allows selection of the desired
redundant memory mode, or disables redundant
memory. This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --redmem=off
redmem=off
NOTE: The system must be rebooted for BIOS
options to take effect.
NOTE: This option is not available on xx1x systems.
--rptkeyerr enable, disable This option configures or reports whether the
BIOS reports keyboard errors during POST.
This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --rptkeyerr=disable
rptkeyerr=disable
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 55
--sata0 auto, off This option enables or disables SATA port 0.
This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --sata0=auto
sata0=auto
NOTE: This option maps to --sata_a for PowerEdge
x9xx systems.
--sata1 auto, off This option enables or disables SATA port 1.
This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --sata1=auto
sata1=auto
NOTE: This option maps to --sata_b for
PowerEdge x9xx systems.
--sata2 auto, off This option enables or disables SATA port 2.
This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --sata2=auto
sata2=auto
NOTE: This option maps to --sata_c for
PowerEdge x9xx systems.
--sata3 auto, off This option enables or disables SATA port 3.
This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --sata3=auto
sata3=auto
NOTE: This option maps to --sata_d for
PowerEdge x9xx systems.
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
56 SYSCFG
--sata4 auto, off This option enables or disables SATA port 4.
This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --sata_4=auto
sata_4=auto
NOTE: This option maps to --sata_e for
PowerEdge x9xx systems.
--sata5 auto, off This option enables or disables SATA port 5.
This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --sata_5=auto
sata_5=auto
NOTE: This option maps to --sata_f for
PowerEdge x9xx systems.
--sata6 auto, off This option enables or disables SATA port 6.
This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --sata_6=auto
sata_6=auto
NOTE: This option maps to --sata_g for
PowerEdge x9xx systems.
--sata7 auto, off This option enables or disables SATA port 7.
This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --sata_7=auto
sata_7=auto
NOTE: This option maps to --sata_h for
PowerEdge x9xx systems.
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 57
--snoopfilter enable, disable This option enables or disables the snoop filter
option from the system BIOS.
Example:
A:>syscfg --snoopfilter=enable
snoopfilter=enable
--speaker on, off This option turns the built-in speaker on or off.
This option can be replicated.
NOTE: The --speaker option is not supported on
certain PowerEdge systems.
Example:
A:>syscfg --speaker=on
speaker=on
--serial1 disable, com1,
com3,
com1_bmc,
bmcserial,
bmclan, rac
This option configures or reports the first serial
port communication port. This option can be
replicated.
bmcserial — maps serial port 1 to BMC Serial.
bmclan — routes the serial traffic destined for
serial1 out to NIC1.
com1_bmc — maps serial port 1 to COM port 1
BMC.
rac — maps serial port 1 to the RAC device.
Example:
A:>syscfg --serial1=rac
serial1=rac
--serial2 auto, disable,
com2, com4
This option configures or reports the second serial
port communication port. This option can be
replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --serial2=disable
serial2=disable
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
58 SYSCFG
--serialcomm on, com1cr,
com2cr, off
This option sets the behavior of the serial port
communication. When set to on, this option tells
the BIOS to enable COM port 1 and COM port
2. These ports are made available for use by the
operating system or applications. BIOS Console
Redirection is disabled.
When set to com1cr, this option tells the BIOS to
enable COM port 1 and COM port 2. These ports
are made available for use by the operating system
or applications. BIOS Console Redirection is
through COM port 1.
When set to com2cr, this option tells the BIOS to
enable COM port 1 and COM port 2. These ports
are made available for use by the operating system
or applications. BIOS Console Redirection is
through COM port 2.
When set to off, this option tells the BIOS to
disable COM port 1 and COM port 2.
This option is replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --serialcomm=on
serialcomm=on
On x9xx systems, the --serialcomm option can be
used with the external serial (--extserial) option
instead of the --conred option.
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 59
--setuppwd <string> This option sets the setup password for the BIOS.
The setup password locks the BIOS F2 screen.
The argument string supplied to this option is the
password. Generally, passwords are limited to
alphanumeric characters and cannot exceed
32 characters in length. If a current setup password
is set, it must be given through the --oldsetuppwd
option. This option is not replicated.
Example 1:
A:>syscfg --setuppwd=
asetuppassword
The password has been set.
Please use a warm reboot to apply
the password to the system.
Example 2:
A:>syscfg --setuppwd=
asetuppassword
--oldsetuppwd=currentpassword
The password has been set.
Please use a warm reboot to apply
the password to the system.
Example 3:
A:>syscfg --setuppwd=
asetuppassword
--oldsetuppwd=currentpassword
The old password entered is
incorrect. The new password will
not be set. Please try again.
NOTE: You cannot disable your password using
DTK. To disable your password, you must use the
system BIOS.
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
60 SYSCFG
--sma enable, disable This option enables or disables processor
sequential memory access.
Example:
A:>syscfg --sma=disable
sma=disable
--svctag* NA This option reports the service tag for a system.
If the system is modular, it displays the service tag
for PowerEdge 1855. If used with the -s general
option, the environment variable is set to the
service tag.
Example:
A:>syscfg --svctag
svctag=113CD1S
NOTE: The asterisk is not part of the command
syntax.
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 61
--syspwd <string> This option sets the system password for the
BIOS. The system password is required when
booting the system. The argument string supplied
to this option is the password. Generally,
passwords are limited to alphanumeric characters
and cannot exceed 32 characters in length. If a
current system password is set, it must be given
through the --oldsyspwd option. This option is not
replicated.
Example 1:
A:>syscfg --syspwd=
password
The password has been set.
Please use a warm reboot to apply
the password to the system.
Example 2:
A:>syscfg --syspwd=
password
--oldsyspwd=
password
The password has been set. Please
use a warm reboot to apply the
password to the system.
NOTE: You cannot disable your password using
DTK. To disable your password, you must use the
system BIOS.
--sysrev NA This option reports the system revision. This is a
read-only option.
tpm
NOTE: For details about the tpm suboptions and arguments, see Table 3-3. This option is
available only on xx0x and xx1x systems.
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
62 SYSCFG
--turbomode enable, disable This option enables or disables core-based turbo
mode. Turbo mode is a feature on Intel processors
that allows one processor core to increase it’s
frequency by one bin whenever the other core has
gone into an idle state.
Example:
A:>syscfg --turbomode=enable
--turbomode=enable
NOTE: This option is available only on xx1x systems
running on Intel processors.
--usb on, legacy, off This option sets or reports the status of the USB
port. When set to on, USB keyboards and mice
function only for systems with operating systems
that have native USB support. When set to
legacy, USB keyboards and mice are supported
through the BIOS to function in operating
systems that do not natively support USB.
This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --usb=on
usb=on
--usbflash auto, fdd, hdd This option sets or reports the emulation for a USB
flash device. The USB flash device can be set to
emulate a hard drive (hdd) or a
diskette drive (fdd). This option can be
replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --usbflash=auto
usbflash=auto
NOTE: This option cannot be set on x9xx, xx0x, and
xx1x systems.
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 63
--usbports enable,
enablebackonly,
disable
This option enables or disables USB ports. When
set to enable, it enables all user accessible USB
ports. When set to enablebackonly, the front user
accessible ports are disabled. When set to disable,
both front and back user accessible ports are
disabled.
This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --usbports=enable
usbports=enable
--virtualization enable, disable This option enables or disables virtualization in
the CPU. When set to enable, it enables the
additional hardware capabilities provided by
Virtualization Technology in applicable CPUs.
When set to disable, it disables the additional
hardware capabilities provided by Virtualization
Technology.
This option can be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --virtualization=enable
virtualization=enable
--virtualmedia enable, disable This option enables or disables virtual media in
Dell Remote Access Controller (DRAC) 5.
Example:
A:>syscfg --virtualmedia=enable
virtualmedia=enable
Table 3-2. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for BIOS Configuration (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Description
64 SYSCFG
Table 3-3 lists the suboptions and arguments for the tpm option.
Table 3-3. Suboptions and Arguments for the tpm Option
Option Suboption Arguments Description
tpm --tpmsecurity off Does not report the presence of TPM to
the operating system.
onwithpbm Directs the BIOS to store the TCG
compliant measurements to the TPM
during a POST operation.
onwithoutp
bm
Directs the BIOS to bypass the pre-boot
measurements.
Example:
A:>syscfg tpm --tpmsecurity =
onwithoutpbm --
setuppwdoverride
--tpmactivation enabled Enables and activates the TPM feature.
disabled Disables and deactivates the TPM feature.
nochange Does not alter the operational state of the
TPM feature.
Example:
A:>syscfg tpm --
tpmactivation=enabled --
setuppwdoverride
NOTE: You cannot set tpmactivation when tpmsecurity is
set to off.
NOTE: After setting tpmactivation to enabled or disabled, if
you reboot your system, DTK displays the ’TPM
Configuration Honoured system will reset
and the system reboots again’ message and
reboots once again.
NOTE: When you set tpmactivation to enabled or disabled,
DTK displays the value of tpmactivation as nochange.
However, the TPM feature is activated/deactivated when
you reboot the system.
SYSCFG 65
--tpmclear NA Clears the contents of the TPM chip
without erasing the tpmsecurity and
tpmactivation settings.
Example:
A:>syscfg tpm --
tpmactivation=enabled --
tpmclear --setuppwdoverride
--
undotpmclear
NA Undoes the result of the tpmclear setting.
If you specify this setting before specifying
the tpmclear setting, the ‘There is
currently no pending TPM Clear
request’ message is displayed.
Example:
A:>syscfg tpm --
tpmactivation=enabled --
undotpmclear --
setuppwdoverride
--valsetuppwd <string> Validates the setup password for TPM
authentication. If you try to change DTK
settings, you will be prompted to enter this
password to access the settings.
Example:
A:>syscfg tpm --
tpmactivation=enabled --
tpmclear --valsetuppwd=
<setup_password>
--
setuppwdover
ride
NA On systems that do not have a setup
password configured, if you set this option,
you will not be prompted for a password to
access DTK settings.
A:>syscfg tpm --
tpmactivation=enabled --
tpmclear --setuppwdoverride
Table 3-3. Suboptions and Arguments for the tpm Option (continued)
Option Suboption Arguments Description
66 SYSCFG
Table 3-4 lists the suboptions and arguments for the power option.
Table 3-4. Suboptions and Arguments for the power Option
Option Suboption Arguments Description
power --profile <powerprofile>
where
powerprofile can
be
maxperformance,
osctl, apc
Displays the settings similar to the BIOS
setup screen for the respective profile.
Reboot the system for the settings to take
effect.
If power profiles are not available on the
platform, an error message is displayed.
A:>syscfg power --profile=
maxperformance --
setuppwdoverride
custom Creates the custom profile. Reboot the
system for the settings to take effect.
A:>syscfg power --profile=
custom --setuppwdoverride
--
cpupowermode
min, max,
osdbpm,
systemdbpm
Allows you to set the CPU power and
performance management to minimum
power, maximum performance, operating
system DBPM, or system DBPM mode.
A:>syscfg power --profile=
custom --cpupowermode=min --
setuppwdoverride
--
memorypower
mode
min, 800, 1067,
1333, max
Allows you to set memory power and
performance management to minimum
power mode, maximum power mode,
800Mhz, 1067Mhz, or 1333Mhz.
A:>syscfg power --profile=
custom --memorypowermode=min
--setuppwdoverride
SYSCFG 67
--
fanpowermode
min, max Allows you to set the fan algorithm to the
minimum power optimized or maximum
performance optimized mode.
A:>syscfg power --profile=
custom --fanpowermode=min --
setuppwdoverride
NOTE: Set the value of --profile to custom to change the values of
cpupowermode, memorypowermode, and fanpowermode.
--profile NA Displays the profile set and the respective
profile parameters.
--cap Displays the values of budgetcap, and the
maximum and minimum power
thresholds in Watts.
--cap
<budgetcap>
--unit <unit>
<budgetcap> is
the limit for
power
consumption in
Watts, or btuphr,
or percent.
<unit> is the
unit of the
<budgetcap>
value and can be
watt, or btuphr,
or percent.
The value of <budgetcap> must be
between the maximum and minimum
threshold values, else an error is displayed.
If the unit is btuphr, it is converted in to
Watts using the formula "Watt = BTU/hr
/3.413". If the unit is percent, the formula
is "Power Cap (Watts) = [ Power supply
rating for input power (Watts) - Min
potential power (Watts) ] * Power Cap
(%) + Min potential power (Watts)]"
A:>syscfg power --cap=<
value
>
--unit=watt --
setuppwdoverride
--maxpowercap Displays the value of the maximum power
threshold.
--minpowercap Displays the value of the minimum power
threshold.
Table 3-4. Suboptions and Arguments for the power Option (continued)
Option Suboption Arguments Description
68 SYSCFG
SYSCFG for BMC and Remote Access Controller
Configuration
SYSCFG configures BMC and Remote Access Controller settings.
NOTE: Some of the following options or arguments might not be available on all
systems.
NOTE: For options that use text strings such as username, password, hostname,
and community string, using some characters such as <space>, <, >, |, or = on the
command line can be misinterpreted by the command line parser and cause errors.
NOTE: The following options or arguments are also applicable to DRAC 5.
The following tables document valid options, suboptions, and arguments
along with a description of the expected behavior of each option and
suboption. Options, suboptions, and arguments are case sensitive. All
options, suboptions, and pre-defined arguments are lowercase unless
explicitly stated otherwise.
--valsetuppwd <string> Validates the setup password for power
authentication. If you try to change the
DTK settings, you are prompted to enter
this password to access the settings.
A:>syscfg power --profile=
maxperformance --valsetuppwd=
<setup_password>
--
setuppwdoverri
de
NA Does not prompt you for a password to
access the DTK settings on systems that
do not have a setup password configured.
A:>syscfg power --profile=
maxperformance
–setuppwdoverride
Table 3-4. Suboptions and Arguments for the power Option (continued)
Option Suboption Arguments Description
SYSCFG 69
The following section documents all the valid options, suboptions, and their
arguments along with a description of the expected behavior using an
example. Some features that need to be noted while reading this section are:
• Unless otherwise specified, all suboptions to options are optional.
• If a suboption is not specified for an option, all valid suboption values are
displayed for the option. If suboptions are specified, then only those
suboptions are reported.
• Wherever options or suboptions take empty strings as input, the string NULL
should be input. For example, options such as
username
and suboptions such
as
commstring
and
hostname
can take an empty string as input.
BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options
Table 3-5 lists the options, suboptions, and pre-defined arguments for
configuring your system BMC and remote access controller (RAC).
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
bmcversion Displays the version
information for the
BMC and the BMC
firmware. This option
cannot be replicated.
--devid NA Reports the BMC
device ID.
--devrevision NA Reports the BMC
device revision.
70 SYSCFG
--majorfwrevision NA Reports the BMC
device major firmware
revision.
--minorfwrevision NA Reports the BMC
device minor firmware
revision.
Example:
A:>syscfg
bmcversion
devid=32
devrevision=0
majorfwrevision=
0
minorfwrevision=
40
--
controlpanelacc
ess
NA viewandmodify,
viewonly, disabled
This option sets or gets
the access level for the
Liquid Crystal Display
(LCD).
Example:
A:>syscfg --
controlpanelacce
ss=viewandmodify
controlpanelacce
ss=viewandmodify
NOTE: This option is
available only on xx1x
systems.
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 71
--clearsel* NA NA Clears the SEL.
This option cannot be
replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --
clearsel
Clearing SEL...
NOTE: The asterisk is
not part of the command
syntax.
--deviceguid* NA NA Displays the GUID for
the BMC. This option
cannot be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --
deviceguid
deviceguid=
XXXXXXXXXX
NOTE: The asterisk is
not part of the command
syntax.
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
72 SYSCFG
--encryptkey NA <hexadecimal
number>
Encrypts the IPMI
sessions.
The hexadecimal
number entered as an
argument is not case
sensitive although the
value returned by the
encryptkey option is
always in uppercase.
The value returned is
appended with zeroes
so that it is always 40
characters long.
Example:
A:>syscfg --
encryptkey=abcd
encryptkey=
ABCD000000000000
0000000000000000
00000000
--identify NA 0–254
NOTE: Use 0 to
stop flashing the
LED.
Flashes the
identification LED for
a specified number of
seconds.
NOTE: This option
applies only to
PowerEdge systems
with a BMC.
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 73
--
kvmstatusonlcd
active, inactive This option configures
the vKVM session
status on the LCD.
Example:
A:>syscfg --
kvmstatusonlcd=
active
kvmstatusonlcd=
active
NOTE: This option is
available only on xx1x
systems.
lanchannelacce
ss
or
lca
Sets or displays the
LAN channel access
settings such as
alerting, IPMI over
LAN, and user
privilege. This option
can be replicated.
--pefalerting enable, disable Enables or disables
PEF alerts. This
suboption can be
replicated.
--ipmioverlan disable,
alwaysavail
Sets the LAN channel
access mode. This
suboption can be
replicated.
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
74 SYSCFG
--channelprivlmt user, operator,
administrator
Sets the maximum
privilege level accepted
for the LAN channel.
This suboption can be
replicated.
Example (to configure
the LAN channel with
alerts and IPMI over
LAN enabled):
A:>syscfg
lanchannelaccess
--pefalerting=
enable
--ipmioverlan=
alwaysavail
lanchannelaccess
pefalerting=
enable
ipmioverlan=
alwaysavail
lanchannelinfo
or
lci
Displays media and
protocol information
about the LAN
channel. This option
cannot be replicated.
lancfgparams
or
lcp
Configures and displays
LAN configuration
parameters. This
option can be
replicated.
--ipaddrsrc static, dhcp Sets the IP address
source for the LAN
channel. This
suboption can be
replicated.
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 75
--ipaddress <ipaddress> Sets the IP address for
the LAN channel.
This suboption cannot
be replicated.
--subnetmask <subnetmask> Sets the subnet mask
for the LAN channel.
This suboption can be
replicated.
--gateway <gateway> Sets the gateway for the
LAN channel.
This suboption can be
replicated.
--commstring <string> Sets the community
string (maximum of
16 printable ASCII
characters) used in a
platform event trap
(PET). This suboption
can be replicated.
--destipaddr <ipaddress> Sets the destination
IP address for the alert
destination specified
with the alertdest
suboption.
The destipaddr
suboption is dependent
on the alertdest
suboption. If the
alertdest suboption is
not specified on the
command line, the first
alert destination
(alertdest=1) is
set with this IP address.
This suboption can be
replicated.
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
76 SYSCFG
--alertdest 1, 2, 3, 4 Sets the destination for
the LAN alert.
This suboption can be
replicated.
--vlantag enable, disable Enables or disables
VLAN tagging. This
suboption can be
replicated.
--vlanid <string> Sets the 12-bit VLAN
ID. This suboption can
be replicated.
--vlanpriority 0–7 Sets the VLAN priority
value. This suboption
can be replicated.
--macaddress NA Displays the BMC
MAC address. This
suboption cannot be
replicated.
--nicselection shared,
sharedfailover,
dedicated,
sharedreceiveonall
Sets the operating
mode of the NIC to
shared/sharedfailover/d
edicated/sharedreceive
onall. Some of these
options are not
applicable on certain
systems.
NOTE: The
sharedreceiveonall
argument is available
only on xx1x systems.
--fullduplex enable, disable Enables or disables full
duplex on the RAC
network interface.
--autoneg enable, disable Enables or disables
autonegotiation.
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 77
--speed 10,100 Sets the network
interface speed to 10 or
100 Mbps.
--dnsdhcp enable, disable Enables or disables
obtaining the DNS
server IP address
through DHCP.
--dnsserver1 <ipaddress> Sets the IP address of
the primary DNS server
for domain name
resolution.
--dnsserver2 <ipaddress> Sets the IP address of
the secondary DNS
server for domain name
resolution.
--dnsregisterrac enable, disable Enables or disables
binding of the RAC
name to the IP address.
--dnsracname <string> Sets the name of the
RAC.
--
domainnamefromdhcp
enable, disable Enables or disables
getting the RAC
domain name through
DHCP.
--domainname <string> Sets the domain name
of the RAC.
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
78 SYSCFG
Example 1 (to display
the current LAN
configuration settings):
A:>syscfg --
lancfgparams
lancfgparams
destipaddr=
192.168.100.15
vlantag=enable
vlanid=1000
vlanpriority=7
macaddress=
0:6:5b:fb:c8:a7
commstring=
public
ipaddrsrc=static
ipaddress=
192.168.100.10
subnetmask=
255.255.255.0
gateway=
192.168.100.1
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 79
Example 2 (to set the
LAN configuration
parameters):
A:>syscfg
lancfgparams
--destipaddr=
192.168.100.15
--vlantag=enable
--vlanid=1000
--vlanpriority=7
--commstring=
public
--ipaddrsrc=
static
--ipaddress=
192.168.100.10
--subnetmask=
255.255.255.0
--gateway=
192.168.100.1
lancfgparams
destipaddr=
192.168.100.15
vlantag=enable
vlanid=1000
vlanpriority=7
macaddress=
0:6:5b:fb:c8:a7
commstring=
public
ipaddrsrc=static
ipaddress=
192.168.100.10
subnetmask=
255.255.255.0
gateway=
192.168.100.1
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
80 SYSCFG
lanuseraccess
or
lua
Configures the
privilege level and
channel accessibility
associated with a
specified User ID for
the LAN channel.
--userid 2–10 if your
system has a
DRAC 4
controller
2–16 if your
system has a
DRAC 5
controller
Sets the User ID. This
suboption can be
replicated.
--usrprivlmt user, operator,
administrator,
noaccess
Sets the maximum
BMC user privilege
level for the LAN
channel for the userid
specified using the
userid suboption. This
suboption can be
replicated. This
suboption is dependent
on the userid
suboption.
--
currentenableduserids
NA Reports the number of
currently enabled User
IDs on the LAN
channel.
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 81
--
useridswithfixednames
NA Reports the number of
User IDs with fixed
names on the LAN
channel.
Example 1 (to enable
User ID 2 on the LAN
channel with
administrator
privileges):
A:>syscfg
lanuseraccess
--userid=2
--usrprivlmt=
administrator
userid=2
usrprivlmt=
administrator
Example 2 (to enable
User ID 4 on the LAN
channel with user
privileges):
A:>syscfg
lanuseraccess
--userid=4
--usrprivlmt=
user
userid=4
usrprivlmt=user
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
82 SYSCFG
--loaddefaults* NA NA Restores the BMC to
the defaults that were
originally loaded on the
controller. This option
is used to return the
BMC to a known-good
state. This option
cannot be replicated.
NOTE: The NMI, power
button, and SOL defaults
are not reset by using
this option.
Example:
A:>syscfg --
loaddefaults
Loading
defaults...
NOTE: The asterisk is
not part of the command
syntax.
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 83
--nextboot NA valid device
name (from
the
--bootseq
option
device list)
This option sets the
specified device as the
first device in the boot
order for the next boot
cycle only. The device
must be a device from
the
--bootseq option device
list. Run the --bootseq
option to see a list of
available device names.
See --bootseq for more
information. This
option is not replicated.
Example 1:
A:>syscfg --
bootseq
Device 1:
floppy.emb.0 -
Diskette Drive
A:
Device 2:
cdrom.emb.0 -
CD-ROM device
Device 3:
hdd.emb.0 - Hard
Drive C:
Device 4:
nic.emb.1 -
Intel Boot Agent
Version 4.0.17
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
84 SYSCFG
Device 5:
nic.emb.2 -
Intel Boot Agent
Version 4.0.17
Example 2:
A:>syscfg --nextboot=
nic.emb.1
nextboot=nic.emb.1
--nmibutton NA enable, disable This option enables or
disables the NMI
button.
This option can be
replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --
nmibutton=
enable
nmibutton=
enable
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 85
passwordaction Configures and tests
the password for the
specified User ID. This
option cannot be
replicated. All three
suboptions, action,
userid, and password,
must be included in the
command line.
NOTE: 20 byte
passwords are not
supported for this
option.
--userid 2–10 if your
system has a
DRAC 4
controller
2–16 if your
system has a
DRAC 5
controller
Specifies the BMC
User ID. This
suboption cannot be
replicated.
--action setpassword,
testpassword
Sets or tests the
password for the
specified User ID. This
suboption cannot be
replicated.
--password <string> Sets the password
(maximum of 16
printable ASCII
characters) for the
specified BMC User
ID. This suboption
cannot be replicated.
Example (to set and
test the password for
User ID 3):
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
86 SYSCFG
A:>syscfg
passwordaction
--userid=3
--action=
setpassword
--password=
bmcmaster
passwordaction
userid=3
action=
setpassword
password=
*********
A:>syscfg
passwordaction
--userid=3
--action=
testpassword
--password=
bmcmastor
Password test
failed.
pefcfgparams
or
pcp
Configures and displays
PEF configuration
parameters. This
option can be
replicated.
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 87
--filter fanfail, voltfail,
discretevoltfail,
tempwarn,
tempfail,
intrusion,
redundegraded,
redunlost,
procwarn, procfail,
powerwarn,
powerfail,
hardwarelogfail,
autorecovery,
batterywarn,
batteryfail,
powerabsent,
procabsent,
systempowerwarn,
systempowerfail
Specifies a PEF value.
This suboption can
be replicated.
See "BMC Platform
Events Filter Alert
Messages" for a
complete list of all
possible PEF messages
along a description of
each event.
NOTE: The fanfail
option is not supported
on x0xx systems.
--filteraction powercycle, reset,
powerdown,
powerreduction,
none
Sets the event filter
action for the filter
specified using the
filter suboption. This
suboption depends on
the filter suboption.
This suboption can
be replicated.
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
88 SYSCFG
--hostname <string> Sets the host name
(maximum of 62
printable ASCII
characters) for the
BMC. This suboption
can be replicated.
The --hostname string
must comprise only
these characters:
hyphen (-), underscore
(_), and period (.).
The length of the --
hostname string must
be 48 characters or less
for x8xx systems and 62
characters or less for
x9xx systems and later.
--filteralert enable, disable Enables or disables
alerts for the filter
specified using the
filter suboption.
This suboption is
dependent on the
filter suboption.
This suboption can be
replicated.
--alertpolnum 1, 2, 3, 4 Specifies the alert
policy entry number.
This suboption can be
replicated.
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 89
--alertpolstatus enable, disable Enables or disables the
alert policy specified
using the alertpolnum
suboption. This
suboption can be
replicated. This
suboption is dependent
on the alertpolnum
suboption.
Example (to set the
PEF configuration
parameters):
Example 1 (To
configure the PEF so
that the system is
powered down in
response to a fan failure
event):
A:>syscfg
pefcfgparams
--filter=fanfail
--filteraction=
powerdown
pefcfgparams
filter=fanfail
filteraction=
powerdown
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
90 SYSCFG
Example 2 (To
configure the PEF so
that a PEF alert is not
sent to the destination
IP address in response
to a chassis intrusion
event):
A:>syscfg
pefcfgparams
--filter=
intrusion
--filteralert=
disable
pefcfgparams
filter=intrusion
filteralert=
disable
--powerbutton NA enable, disable This option enables or
disables the power
button. This option can
be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg --
powerbutton=
enable
powerbutton=
enable
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 91
--powerctl NA powerdown
</argument>
This option performs a
chassis powerdown and
controls the reset of the
system.
Powerdown shuts off
the system.
powercycle
</argument>
Powercycle shuts off
the system and
automatically turns on
your system after a few
seconds.
reset
</argument>
Resets the system.
softshutdown
</argument>
In Linux, the system
shuts down
immediately.
In Windows PE, this
option does not work.
NOTE: This option
applies only to
PowerEdge systems that
are configured with a
BMC.
This argument requires
ACPI support to
function properly.
--racreset NA NA This option resets the
RAC. It cannot be
accompanied with any
other option. This
option cannot be
replicated.
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
92 SYSCFG
--
serialchannelac
cess
or
sca
Sets or displays the
channel access settings
for the serial channel.
This option can be
replicated.
--ipmioverserial disable,
alwaysavail
Sets the serial channel
access mode.
This suboption can be
replicated.
--channelprivlmt user, operator,
administrator
Sets the maximum
privilege level accepted
for the serial channel.
This suboption can be
replicated.
Example (to configure
the serial channel with
IPMI over serial disabled
and the maximum
privilege level set to
administrator):
A:>syscfg
serialchannelacc
ess
--
ipmioverserial=
disable
--
channelprivlmt=
administrator
serialchannelacc
ess
ipmioverserial=
disable
channelprivlmt=
administrator
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 93
--
serialchannelinfo
or
sci
Displays media and
protocol information
about the serial
channel. This option
cannot be replicated.
--mediumtype NA Displays the medium
type for the serial
channel. This
suboption cannot be
replicated.
--prottype NA Displays the protocol
type for the serial
channel. This
suboption cannot be
replicated.
--ssnsupport NA Displays the session
support information for
the serial channel. This
suboption cannot be
replicated.
--activessncount NA Displays the number of
sessions that are
activated on the serial
channel. This
suboption cannot be
replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg
serialchannelinf
o
--mediumtype
mediumtype=
asynch
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
94 SYSCFG
serialcfgparams
or
scp
Configures and displays
serial configuration
parameters. This
option can be
replicated.
--connectionmode basic, terminal Sets the connection
mode used to perform
IPMI messaging to the
BMC. This suboption
can be replicated.
--msgcommflowctrl noflowctrl, rtscts Sets the IPMI message
communication flow
control. This suboption
can be replicated.
--msgcommdtrhangup NA Reports the IPMI
message
communication DTR
hang-up. This
suboption cannot be
replicated.
--msgcommbitrate 9600, 19200,
57600, 115200
Sets the IPMI message
communication baud
rate in bits per second
(bps). This suboption
can be replicated.
--tmcfglineediting enable, disable Sets the line editing
value for terminal
mode configuration.
This suboption can be
replicated.
--tmcfgdelctrl del, bksp Sets the delete control
value for terminal
mode configuration.
This suboption can be
replicated.
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 95
--tmcfgechoctrl echo, noecho Sets the echo control
value for terminal
mode configuration.
This suboption can be
replicated.
--tmcfghandshakectrl enable, disable Sets the handshake
control value for
terminal mode
configuration. This
suboption can
be replicated.
--tmcfgnewlineseq noterm, crlf, null,
cr, lfcr,1f
Sets the new line
sequence value for
terminal mode
configuration. This
suboption can be
replicated.
--
tmcfginputnewlineseq
cr, null Sets the input new line
sequence value for
terminal mode
configuration. This
suboption can
be replicated.
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
96 SYSCFG
Example (to display the
current serial
configuration settings):
A:> syscfg
serialcfgparams
serialcfgparams
tmcfgdelctrl=del
tmcfgechoctrl=
echo
tmcfghandshakect
rl=enable
connectionmode=
terminal
tmcfgnewlineseq=
crlf
msgcommflowctrl=
rtscts
tmcfginputnewlin
eseq=cr
msgcommdtrhangup
=disable
msgcommbitrate=
19200
tmcfglineediting
=enable
serialuseraccess
or
sua
Configures the
privilege level and
channel accessibility
associated with a
specified User ID for
the serial channel. This
option can be
replicated.
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 97
--userid 2–10 if your
system has a
DRAC 4
controller
2–16 if your
system has a
DRAC 5
controller
Sets the User ID. This
suboption can be
replicated.
--usrprivlmt user, operator,
administrator,
noaccess
Sets the maximum
BMC user privilege
level for the serial
channel for the User ID
specified using the
userid suboption. This
suboption can be
replicated. This
suboption is dependent
on the
userid suboption.
--
currentenableduserids
NA Reports the number of
currently enabled User
IDs on the serial
channel. This
suboption can
be replicated.
--
useridswithfixednames
NA Reports the number of
User IDs with fixed
names on the serial
channel. This
suboption can be
replicated.
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
98 SYSCFG
Example 1 (to enable
User ID 2 on the serial
channel with
administrator
privileges):
A:>syscfg
serialuseraccess
--userid=2
--usrprivlmt=
administrator
--status=enable
userid=2
usrprivlmt=
administrator
status=enable
Example 2 (to enable
User ID 4 on the serial
channel with user
privileges):
A:>syscfg
serialuseraccess
--userid=4
--usrprivlmt=
user
--status=enable
userid=4
usrprivlmt=user
status=enable
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 99
solaction This option enables or
disables Serial-Over-
LAN (SOL) access for a
particular user.
This option can be
replicated.
A:>syscfg
solaction --
userid=2 --
action=disable
solaction
userid=2 action=
disable
--userid 2–10 if your
system has a
DRAC 4
controller
2–16 if your
system has a
DRAC 5
controller
Specifies the BMC user
ID. This suboption can
be replicated.
--action enable, disable Enables or disables the
user ID specified using
the userid suboption.
This suboption can be
replicated and is
dependent on the
userid suboption.
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
100 SYSCFG
solcfgparams Configures and displays
SOL configuration
parameters. This
option can be
replicated.
--solenable enable, disable Enables or disables
whether the SOL
payload type can be
activated. This option
can be replicated.
--solprivlevel user, operator,
administrator
Sets the minimum user
privilege level required
to activate the SOL.
This option can be
replicated.
--solcharaccuminterval 1–255 Sets the Character
Accumulate Interval in
5-ms increments
(1–255). This sets the
typical amount of time
that the BMC will wait
before transmitting a
partial SOL character
data packet. This
option can be
replicated.
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 101
--solcharsendthreshold 1–255 Specifies that the BMC
will automatically send
an SOL character data
packet containing this
number of characters in
increments of 5
(1–255) as soon as this
number of characters
(or greater) has been
accepted from the
baseboard serial
controller into the
BMC. This option can
be replicated.
NOTE: On x8xx systems,
the maximum limit for --
solcharsendthreshold is
200. On x9xx systems,
the maximum limit is 255.
On the Dell PowerEdge
SC1435 system, the
maximum limit is 255.
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
102 SYSCFG
--solbitrate 9600, 19200,
57600, 115200
Sets the serial channel
communication bit rate
(in bps) with the BMC
when SOL is activated.
This option can be
replicated.
NOTE: The arguments
for --solbitrate vary with
various generations of
Dell systems. If an
argument valid for a
particular generation is
entered for another
generation, the
‘Parameter out of
range’ error is
displayed.
Valid arguments are:
19200 - for x8xx systems
57600 - for x9xx systems
that do not have DRAC
5 installaed
115200 - for x9xx
systems that have
DRAC 5 installaed
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 103
Example 1 (to display
the current SOL
configuration):
A:> syscfg
solcfgparams
solcfgparams
solenable=enable
solprivlevel=
administrator
solcharaccuminte
rval=25
solcharsendthres
hold=25
solbitrate=9600
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
104 SYSCFG
solcfgparams Example 2 (to set the
SOL configuration
parameters):
A:>syscfg
solcfgparams
--solenable=
disable
--solprivlevel=
administrator
--
solcharaccuminte
rval=25
--
solcharsendthres
hold=100
--solbitrate=
9600
solcfgparams
solenable=
disable
solprivlevel=
administrator
solcharaccuminte
rval=25
solcharsendthres
hold=100
solbitrate=9600
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 105
ssninfo Displays information
about the number of
possible active sessions
and the number of
currently active
sessions on all channels
on the BMC. This
option cannot be
replicated.
--maxactivessns NA Displays the maximum
possible active BMC
sessions. This
suboption cannot be
replicated.
--currentactivessns NA Displays the number of
currently active
sessions on all channels
of the BMC. This
suboption cannot
be replicated.
Example:
A:>syscfg
ssninfo
currentactives
sns=1
maxactivessns=
4
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
106 SYSCFG
useraction Enables and disables
BMC, sua, and lua user
IDs. This option can be
replicated.
--userid 2–10 if your
system has a
DRAC 4
controller
2–16 if your
system has a
DRAC 5
controller
Specifies the BMC user
ID. This suboption can
be replicated.
--action enable, disable Enables or disables the
user ID specified using
the userid suboption.
This suboption can be
replicated. This
suboption is dependent
on the userid
suboption.
Example (to disable
User ID 3):
A:>syscfg
useraction
--userid=3 --
action=disable
useraction
userid=3
action=disable
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 107
username Sets the BMC User ID
and username. This
option can be
replicated.
--userid 2–10 if your
system has a
DRAC 4
controller
2–16 if your
system has a
DRAC 5
controller
Specifies the User ID.
This suboption can
be replicated.
--name <string> Sets the username
(maximum of 16
printable ASCII
characters) for the User
ID specified using the
userid suboption. This
suboption can be
replicated. This
suboption is dependent
on the userid
suboption.
Example 1 (to
configure User ID 3
with a user name):
A:>syscfg
username
--userid=3
--name=
bmcmaster
username
userid=3
name=
bmcmaster
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
108 SYSCFG
SYSCFG for State Configuration
The SYSCFG utility allows the user to write a state data value on a system.
This value is preserved across reboot or power-off operations. Users can use
this state data value for storing important state information, such as the
progress of a multi-reboot deployment process.
SYSCFG Options for State Configuration
Table 3-6 documents all valid options and arguments along with a description
of the expected behavior of each option.
NOTE: Some of the following options or arguments might not be available on all
systems.
Example 2 (to display
the username for User
ID 3):
A:>syscfg
username --
userid=3 --name
username
userid=3
name=
bmcmaster
--version* NA NA Displays the version
information for the
SYSCFG utility.
NOTE: The asterisk is
not part of the command
syntax.
Table 3-5. BMC and Remote Access Controller Configuration Options (continued)
Option Suboption Valid Arguments Description
SYSCFG 109
Table 3-6. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for State Configuration
Option Valid
Arguments
Description
-b
or
--byte
<string> This option specifies a value to write to state data.
The format of the argument must be in decimal format
unless the -x option is given. If the -x option is given, the
value is interpreted as hexadecimal format. The value can
optionally contain 0x. The decimal range is 0–255, and the
hexadecimal range is 0x00–0xFF.
Example:
A:>syscfg -b 1
The state byte has been set to 1.
A:>syscfg -b 2 -x
The state byte has been set to 0x02.
-r
or
--read*
NA This option reads the value of state data. When used with
the -x option, the value is reported in hexadecimal format
(0xNN).
Example:
A:>sysfg -r -x
The state byte has been set to 0x02.
A:>syscfg -r
The state byte has been set to 2.
NOTE: The asterisk is not part of the command syntax.
-x
or
--hex
None This option specifies that a value should be in hexadecimal
format.
Example:
A:>sysfg -r -x
The state byte has been set to 0x01.
A:>sysfg -x -b 0x02
The state byte has been set to 0x02.
110 SYSCFG
SYSCFG for System Configuration
SYSCFG enables system configuration and reporting. It reports system
identification values, processor types and speeds, memory size, and detects
device using PCI scan.
Options for System Configuration
Table 3-7 documents valid options and arguments along with a description of
the expected behavior of each option. Options and arguments are case
sensitive. All options and pre-defined arguments are lowercase unless stated
otherwise.
NOTE: Some of the following options or arguments might not be available on all
systems.
Table 3-7. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for System Configuration
Option Valid
Arguments
Description
--asset None This option reports the customer-programmable asset tag
number for a system. This option displays the asset tag for
a system. For modular systems, the SYSCFG utility
reports the asset tag for both the server module and the
asset tag for its chassis.
Example:
A:>syscfg--asset
asset=ASSET
--biosver* None This option reports the BIOS version for a system. If used
with the -s option, the environment variable is set to the
BIOS version.
Example:
A:>syscfg --biosver
biosver=A08
NOTE: The asterisk is not part of the command syntax.
SYSCFG 111
--chassvctag* None This option reports the chassis service tag for modular
systems.
Example:
A:>syscfg --chassvctag
chassvctag=SVCTAG1
--cpucount* None This command reports the number of processors found on
the system.
Example 1:
A:>syscfg --cpucount
cpucount=1
Example 2:
A:>syscfg --cpucount
cpucount=2
NOTE: The asterisk is not part of the command syntax.
--cpuspeed* None This option reports the speed of all processors in a system.
Example:
A:>syscfg --cpuspeed
cpuspeed=1000MHz
NOTE: The asterisk is not part of the command syntax.
Table 3-7. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for System Configuration (continued)
Option Valid
Arguments
Description
112 SYSCFG
--envfile <filename> This option reads the environment variable file (included
in DTK as sys.ini) and sets environment variables to
names in the file, based on the system's information.
Primarily, this command performs a PCI scan and matches
the vendor/device numbers of the devices to those
specified in the environment variable file. For more
information, see the "Environment Variable File" section.
Example:
A:>syscfg --envfile sys.ini
DELLNIC1=INTEL PRO100
DELLNIC2=INTEL PRO100
DVIDEO1=RAGEXL
DIDE1=PEQUR/ROSS IDE
DSCSI1=AIC-7899
--mem* None This option reports the amount of system memory
physically installed in the system, not the amount of
memory available to an operating system. If used with the -
s option, the environment variable is set to the amount of
system memory. The last two characters of the memory
value indicate the order of magnitude used (KB or MB).
Example:
A:>syscfg --mem
mem=256MB
NOTE: The asterisk is not part of the command syntax.
Table 3-7. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for System Configuration (continued)
Option Valid
Arguments
Description
SYSCFG 113
-n <filename> This option specifies an input file to use for resolving PCI
vendor and device numbers to strings. The file must be
present (with read rights) and contain a properly formatted
list. See "PCI Reporting" for more information. This
option must be used with the --pci option.
Example:
A:>syscfg -n pci.txt --pci
PCI Bus: 2, Device: 4, Function: 0
Vendor: 8086 - Intel Corp.
Device: 1229 - 82557/8/9 [Ethernet
Pro 100]
Sub Vendor:8086 - Intel Corp.
Sub Device:1017 - EtherExpress PRO/100+
Dual Port Server Adapter
Slot: 01
Class: 02 - Network
SubClass: 00 - Ethernet
--ovrwrt* None When used with the --outfile option, this option specifies
that the output file should be overwritten if it exists.
Example:
A:>syscfg -outfile=out.ini --ovrwrt
NOTE: The asterisk is not part of the command syntax.
Table 3-7. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for System Configuration (continued)
Option Valid
Arguments
Description
114 SYSCFG
--pci* None This option performs a scan of all PCI buses and displays
the results. The utility uses an open source pci.ids file for
vendor/device name resolution. The utility looks for a file
called pci.ids in the current working directory. If the file is
not found in the current working directory, the directory
containing the SYSCFG executable is searched. If the -n
option is used to specify a filename, this filename is used
for resolution. If a specific filename is not given and the
pci.ids file cannot be found, Unknown will be printed for
all vendor and device codes.
For more information, see the "PCI Reporting" section.
Example 1 (the pci.ids filename is specified in the
command line instance):
A:>syscfg -n pci.ids --pci
PCI Bus: 0, Device: 0, Function: 0
Vendor: 1166 - ServerWorks
Device: 0012 - CMIC-LE
Slot: 00
Class: 06 - Bridge
SubClass: 00 - CPU/PCI
PCI Bus: 0, Device: 0, Function: 1
Vendor: 1166 - ServerWorks
Device: 0012 - CMIC-LE
Slot: 00
Class: 06 - Bridge
SubClass: 00 - CPU/PCI
PCI Bus: 0, Device: 0, Function: 2
Vendor: 1166 - ServerWorks
Device: 0000 - Unknown
Table 3-7. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for System Configuration (continued)
Option Valid
Arguments
Description
SYSCFG 115
Slot: 00
Class: 06 - Bridge
SubClass: 00 - CPU/PCI
None Example 2 (the pci.ids file is located in the same directory
as the utility so that names resolve):
A:>syscfg --pci
PCI Bus: 0, Device: 0, Function: 0
Vendor: 1166 - ServerWorks
Device: 0012 - CMIC-LE
Slot: 00
Class: 06 - Bridge
SubClass: 00 - CPU/PCI
PCI Bus: 0, Device: 0, Function: 1
Vendor: 1166 - ServerWorks
Device: 0012 - CMIC-LE
Slot: 00
Class: 06 - Bridge
SubClass: 00 - CPU/PCI
PCI Bus: 0, Device: 0, Function: 2
Vendor: 1166 - ServerWorks
Device: 0000 - Unknown
Slot: 00
Class: 06 - Bridge
SubClass: 00 - CPU/PCI
Table 3-7. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for System Configuration (continued)
Option Valid
Arguments
Description
116 SYSCFG
None Example 3 (a pci.ids file does not exist):
A:>syscfg --pci
PCI Bus: 0, Device: 0, Function: 0
Vendor: 1166 - Unknown
Device: 0012 - Unknown
Slot: 00
Class: 06 - Bridge
SubClass: 00 - CPU/PCI
PCI Bus: 0, Device: 0, Function: 1
Vendor: 1166 - Unknown
Device: 0012 - Unknown
Slot: 00
Class: 06 - Bridge
SubClass: 00 - CPU/PCI
PCI Bus: 0, Device: 0, Function: 2
Vendor: 1166 - Unknown
Device: 0000 - Unknown
Slot: 00
Class: 06 - Bridge
SubClass: 00 - CPU/PCI
NOTE: The asterisk is not part of the command syntax.
-s <string> This option sets an environment variable to the value of a
function command option. The string argument must be
alphanumeric without any spaces or symbols. The variable
name is upper-cased before being set. This option must be
used with at least one function command.
Example:
A:>syscfg -s ENVNAME --svctag
ENVNAME=
SERVICE
Table 3-7. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for System Configuration (continued)
Option Valid
Arguments
Description
SYSCFG 117
--slot* None This option reports the slot of a modular system. If the
system is not modular, the slot is reported as 0. If used with
the -s option, the environment variable is set to the slot.
Example 1 (for a modular system):
A:>syscfg --slot
slot=1
Example 2 (for a non-modular system):
A:>syscfg --slot
slot=0
NOTE: This option is valid for PowerEdge 1855 servers only.
The asterisk is not part of the command syntax.
--svctag* None This option reports the service tag for a system. If used
with the -s option, the environment variable is set to the
BIOS version.
Example:
A:>syscfg --svctag
svctag=113CD1S
NOTE: The asterisk is not part of the command syntax.
--sysasset None This option reports the system asset tag for modular
systems.
Example:
A:>syscfg --sysasset
sysasset=ASSET01
Table 3-7. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for System Configuration (continued)
Option Valid
Arguments
Description
118 SYSCFG
--sysid* None This function command reports the unique system id
bytes for a server. Servers contain a unique ID value based
on their model. The ID value is reported as a hexadecimal
value with a leading 0x, lowercase hexadecimal letters, and
zero-padded to 2 bytes. If used with the -s general option,
the environment variable is set to the system ID.
Example:
A:>syscfg --sysid
sysid=0x00df
NOTE: The asterisk is not part of the command syntax.
--sysname* None This function command reports the system identification
string for a server, which is the string displayed under the
Dell logo during POST. If used with the -s option, the
environment variable is set to the system name.
Example:
A:>syscfg --sysname
sysname=PowerEdge 1550/1000
NOTE: The asterisk is not part of the command syntax.
--syssvctag* None This option reports the system service tag for a modular
system.
Example:
A:>syscfg --syssvctag
syssvctag=BLADE01
NOTE: The asterisk is not part of the command syntax.
--uuid* None This option reports the UUID for a system. The UUID is a
unique system identifier used in PXE requests.
Example:
A:>syscfg --uuid
uuid=44454C4C-5300-104C-8044-
B1C04F423131
NOTE: The asterisk is not part of the command syntax.
Table 3-7. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for System Configuration (continued)
Option Valid
Arguments
Description
SYSCFG 119
SYSCFG for IPv6 Configuration
Table 3-8 lists all valid options and arguments for IPv6 configuration along
with a description of each option. These options are applicable only if the
DRAC in your system supports IPv6.
Table 3-8. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for IPv6 Configuration
Option Suboption Valid
Argument
Description
lancfgparamsv6
or lcpv6
--ipv6 enable,
disable
Loads or unloads the IPv6 stack.
A:> syscfg lcpv6 --ipv6=
enable
--ipsrcv6=static
--ipaddrv6=
<ipv6address> --
prefixlengthv6=
<
prefixlengthv6>
--gatewayv6=<
ipv6gatewayaddre
ss>
NA Allows you to manually configure
IPv6 addresses.
A:>syscfg lcpv6 --
ipsrcv6=static --
ipaddrv6=
1234:1234:1234::1234 --
prefixlengthv6=32 --
gatewayv6=
1234:1234:1234::1
--ipsrcv6=auto NA Automatically configures the IPv6
addresses.
A:> syscfg lcpv6 --
ipsrcv6=auto
--dnssrcv6 =auto NA Automatically configures the DNS
address.
A:> syscfg lcpv6 --
dnssrcv6=auto
--dnssrcv6=static
--dnsserver1v6=
<ipv6dnsserver1a
ddress>
NA Allows you to manually set the DNS
address.
120 SYSCFG
PCI Reporting
The scan of the PCI bus will use a file to resolve PCI vendor and device codes
to vendor information strings. The format of the PCI output is as follows:
PCI Bus: 2, Device: 4, Function: 0
Vendor: 8086 - Intel Corp.
Device: 1229 - 82557/8/9 [Ethernet Pro 100]
Sub Vendor:8086 - Intel Corp.
Sub Device:1017 - EtherExpress PRO/100+ Dual Port
Server Adapter
Slot: 01
Class: 02 - Network
SubClass: 00 - Ethernet
If the file for vendor resolution is not present, the utility will print Unknown
next to a vendor name. If the file for environment variable names is not present,
the utility will fail the environment variable operation.
The pci.ids file is located at \DELL\TOOLKIT\TOOLS on Windows
systems and /opt/dell/toolkit/bin on Linux systems. For more information
and examples, see the --pci option in Table 3-7.
--
linklocaladdripv6
=
<linklocaladdripv
6>
Allows you to view IPv6 addresses.
A:> syscfg lcpv6 --
linklocaladdripv6=
134.56.45.233
--gatewayv6=
<gatewayv6>
Allows you to view IP gatewayv6
address.
Table 3-8. SYSCFG Options and Arguments for IPv6 Configuration
Option Suboption Valid
Argument
Description
SYSCFG 121
Environment Variable File
The environment variable file can be used for discovering and recording
system information to environment variables. The file consists of
several .ini-formatted sections that map PCI vendor/device numbers to
environment variable values. The environment variable file is sys.ini in
\DELL\TOOLKIT\TOOLS on Windows systems and on Linux systems,
you can find it in /opt/dell/toolkit/bin. For example, the [DELLNIC]
section header designates that an environment variable named dellnic1
should be set to the value of the name/value pair whose name matches the
NIC's vendor/device number. If multiple NICs are present on a system, the
environment variables are numbered sequentially: dellnic1, dellnic2,
and so on.
Environmental Variable File Excerpt (sys.ini)
[DELLNIC]
;environment variable will be set to INTELPRO100F for
vendor 8086, dev 1001
8086,1001=INTELPRO1000F
;environment variable will be set to INTELPRO100T for
vendor 8086, dev 1004
8086,1004=INTELPRO1000T
;environment variable will be set to INTELPRO100XT for
vendor 8086, dev 1008
8086,1008=INTELPRO1000XT
The names of the environment variables can be changed in the Variable
Names section. If a name is changed, the section that corresponds to that
name must be changed as well.
Also available in the .ini file is a section that maps the system ID number to a
string. This string can be used to identify the system during the discovery phase
of deployment. The section name is the environment variable that will be set to
the value of the name/value pair whose name matches the system ID.
To change the name of the environment variable, change the value of the
MACHINE name in the Variable Names section, and change the
corresponding section name.
122 SYSCFG
RAIDCFG 125
RAIDCFG
This section documents the Deployment Toolkit (DTK) RAID configuration
utility. The RAIDCFG utility provides a single command line tool that can
configure all supported RAID controllers.
Features
The RAID configuration utility has the following general features:
• Displays help and usage information.
• Reads configuration options from the Command Line Interface (CLI)
parameters.
• Enumerates RAID controllers, physical disks, and virtual disks.
• Creates and deletes virtual disks.
• Logs activity to a given filename.
• Returns specific error codes and messages.
• Assigns and unassigns global and dedicated hot spares.
NOTE: In Microsoft® Windows® Preinstallation Environment (Windows PE),
you can find the RAIDCFG utility in \DELL\TOOLKIT\TOOLS. In Linux, you can find it
in /opt/dell/toolkit/bin.
Supported RAID Controllers
The RAIDCFG utility supports the following RAID controllers:
• PERC 3/DC, PERC 3/QC, PERC 3/SC
• PERC 4/SC, PERC 4/DC, PERC 4/Di, PERC 4/IM
• PERC 4e/DC, PERC 4e/Di, PERC 4e/Si
• PERC 5/E Adapter, PERC 5/I Integrated, PERC 5/i Adapter
• CERC SATA 1.5/6-Channel (CH), CERC SATA 1.5/2S, and PERC 3/Di
(These controllers are supported in Linux only.)
• SAS 5iR Integrated, SAS 5iR Adapter
126 RAIDCFG
• SAS 6iR Integrated, SAS 6iR Adapter
• PERC 6/E Adapter, PERC 6/i Integrated, PERC 6/i Adapter
• PERC 6.2 SSD
RAIDCFG Dependencies
For the RAIDCFG utility to run successfully in Windows PE, it requires that
the mr2kserv utility is located in the same directory as RAIDCFG. The
RAIDCFG utility also requires that lsivil.dll (for Windows) or lsivil.so (for
Linux) and sasvil.dll (for Windows) or sasvil.dll (for Linux) be in the same
directory as RAIDCFG.
The mr2kserv is a service that is automatically started by the DTK startup
script. This service is required to configure all LSI RAID controllers in
Windows PE. This will be automatically started by the DTK startup script.
This service provides Plug and Play support.
RAIDCFG Options and Arguments
Table 4-1 lists all of the valid options, parameters, and arguments for the
RAIDCGFG utility. For more information on valid RAIDCFG options and
their specific uses, see "RAID Configuration Utility Options and Arguments."
Mandatory command line options must be present in the command.
Optional command line options can be typed in any order after all mandatory
options have been typed. Many options have both a short and long format.
Short and long format options cannot be used in the same command line
instance.
Table 4-1 shows some examples of valid and invalid short and long format
command line instances. See "RAID Configuration Utility Options and
Arguments" for an explanation of the specific order for each option. See
Table 4-15 for a list of frequently used RAID commands.
NOTE: Some of the following options or arguments might not be available on all
systems.
RAIDCFG 127
Table 4-1. RAIDCFG Short and Long Format Options
Option Valid Arguments Short Description Mandatory or
Optional
No option
-h
-?
or
/?
NA Displays general usage
information for the utility.
The usage information
consists of a comprehensive
list of valid options,
parameters, and arguments.
Optional.
See Table 4-2 for
specific usage
information.
-ac
or
action
cvd
or
createvdisk
Creates a virtual disk.
NOTE: When providing
multiple physical disks for the
createvdisk command, do not
separate the disks with
spaces. For example, -ad=
1:4, 1:5 causes an error.
The correct syntax for
displaying multiple physical
disks is -ad=
1:4,1:5,1:6.
See Table 4-4 for
specific usage
information.
-ac
or
action
dvd
or
deletevdisk
Deletes a virtual disk. See Table 4-9 for
specific usage
information.
-ac
or
action
rghs
or
removeglobalhots
pare
Unassigns all global hot
spares to disks on the
specified controller.
Optional.
See Table 4-10 for
specific usage
information.
-ac
or
action
sghs
or
setglobalhotspare
Assigns the specified disks
as global hot spares on the
specified controller.
Optional.
See Table 4-10 for
specific usage
information.
-ad
or
adisk
NA Specifies an array disk
command.
See Table 4-5 for
specific usage
information.
128 RAIDCFG
-ad
or
adisk
ch:targ, ch:targ, ...
or ch:targ:lun,...
or ch:targ:enc
channel:target, or
channel:target:lun
, or
channel:target:en
closure
Specifies an array disk.
For SCSI controllers, the
value of lun should always
be 0.
For SAS controllers, the
value of enclosure can be
non-zero, in which case you
need to specify values for
channel, target, and
enclosure.
NOTE: You can also use
pdisk or -pd instead of adisk
or -ad to specify an array
disk.
Optional.
See Table 4-5 for
specific usage
information.
-c
or
controllerid
<valid controller
ID number>
Specifies a RAID controller. See Table 4-3 for
specific usage
information.
-cp
or
cachepolicy
d, c Specifies the virtual disk
cache policy.
Optional.
See Table 4-4 for
specific usage
information.
-ctrl
or
controller
NA Displays a list of the
supported RAID controllers
in the system, along with
select property information.
Mandatory, must
be typed in the
correct order.
See Table 4-3 for
specific usage
information.
-envc
or
envcommand
<string> Sets a user-defined
environmental variable
(<string>) to the value
returned from a function
call.
See Table 4-11 for
specific usage
information.
Table 4-1. RAIDCFG Short and Long Format Options (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Short Description Mandatory or
Optional
RAIDCFG 129
-envn
or
envname
<string> Sets the environment
variable (<string>) that
equates to the value
returned from a function
call.
See Table 4-11 for
specific usage
information.
-fd
or
failoverdrive
ch:targ, ch:targ, ...
or ch:targ:lun,...
or ch:targ:enc
channel:target, or
channel:target:lun
, or
channel:target:en
closure
Specifies the location of the
failover drive in an array.
For SCSI controllers, the
value of lun should
always be 0.
For SAS controllers, the
value of enclosure can be
non-zero, in which case you
need to specify values for
channel, target, and
enclosure.
NOTE: From DTK 2.4
onwards, the -fd option
creates dedicated hot spares
instead of global hot spares.
To set global hot spares, see
Table 4-10.
Optional.
See Table 4-4 for
specific usage
information.
-i <filename> Reads the RAID
configuration information
from the given .ini filename
and creates the RAID
configurations on the
specified controllers.
Mandatory.
See Table 4-13 for
specific usage
information.
-l
or
logfile
<filename> Logs command line output
to a file.
Optional.
See Table 4-14 for
specific usage
information.
Table 4-1. RAIDCFG Short and Long Format Options (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Short Description Mandatory or
Optional
130 RAIDCFG
-o <filename> Reads the RAID
configurations from all
available controllers and
write these configurations
in the given .ini filename.
Mandatory.
See Table 4-13 for
specific usage
information.
-r
or
raid
<valid RAID level
number>
Sets the RAID level for the
array.
Valid RAID values are 0, 1,
5, 10, 50.
If no value is specified for
RAID, 0 is taken as the
default level.
Optional.
See Table 4-4 for
specific usage
information.
-rp
or
readpolicy
ra, ara, nra, rc, nrc Sets the read policy for the
virtual disk.
Optional.
See Table 4-4 for
specific usage
information.
-se
or
setenvironment
NA Sets a user-defined
environment variable to the
value returned from the
function call. Function calls
are:
getcontrollerslot
s, getfirmware,
getcontrollertype,
getadisks,
getadiskcount,
getfreeadisks,
getfreeadiskcount,
getfreeadisksize,
gethotspares.
Mandatory.
See Table 4-11 for
specific usage
information.
-si
or
silent
NA Does not display any
information on the
terminal console.
Optional.
See Table 4-14 for
specific usage
information.
Table 4-1. RAIDCFG Short and Long Format Options (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Short Description Mandatory or
Optional
RAIDCFG 131
-sz
or
size
<number> Sets the maximum size on
the virtual disk in MB or GB
if the size is not provided.
The default size is in MB. If
GB follows the number, the
size is expressed in GB.
Optional.
See Table 4-4 for
specific usage
information.
-sp
or
spanlength
<number> The span size of RAID 5,
which is a mandatory
parameter for RAID 50.
NOTE: Spanlength is
applicable only for RAID 50.
The minimum permissible
spanlength value is 3. The
number of array disks for
creating virtual disks should
not be a prime number and
should be divisible by the
specified spanlength.
Mandatory.
See Table 4-4 for
specific usage
information.
-ssz
or
stripesize
<number> Sets the stripe size on the
virtual disk in KB.
NOTE: When creating virtual
disks, do not specify the units
for chunk (stripe) size. The
units are always listed in KB.
Optional.
See Table 4-4 for
specific usage
information.
-vd
or
vdisk
NA Displays the virtual disks
under all of the controllers
along with the physical array
disks that make up the
virtual disks.
See Table 4-6 for
specific usage
information.
-vd
or
vdisk
<valid virtual disk
ID number>
Displays the specified
virtual disk.
Optional.
See Table 4-6 for
specific usage
information.
Table 4-1. RAIDCFG Short and Long Format Options (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Short Description Mandatory or
Optional
132 RAIDCFG
RAID Configuration Utility Options and Arguments
The following tables document valid options, parameters, and arguments
along with a description of the expected behavior of each option. Options,
parameters, and pre-defined arguments are case sensitive and entered in
lowercase, unless stated otherwise. The information is grouped by task in the
following sections:
• General Help
• Enumerating RAID Controllers
• Creating Virtual Disks
• Enumerating Array Disks
• Enumerating Virtual Disks
• Initializing Virtual Disks
• Importing and Clearing Foreign Configurations
• Deleting Virtual Disks
• Assigning and Unassigning Global Hot Spares
-ver
or
version
NA Displays the version
number of the utility.
Optional.
See Table 4-14 for
specific usage
information.
-wp
or
writepolicy
wb, wt, wc, nwc Sets the write policy for a
virtual disk. The valid
arguments are: wb (write-
back caching),
wt (write-through caching),
wc (write-caching), and nwc
(no-write-caching).
Optional.
See Table 4-14 for
specific usage
information.
Table 4-1. RAIDCFG Short and Long Format Options (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Short Description Mandatory or
Optional
RAIDCFG 133
• Setting Environment Variables
• RAID Replication Options
• Miscellaneous Options
NOTE: Some of the following options or arguments might not be available on all
systems.
General Help
Table 4-2 lists the RAIDCFG general help options.
Table 4-2. General Help
Options Parame
ters
Valid
Arguments
Description
No
option
-h
-?
or
/?
NA NA Displays general usage information for the utility.
The usage information consists of a comprehensive
list of valid options, parameters, and arguments.
This option is optional and can be added to the
command line in any order.
Example:
A:>raidcfg -h
Provides users with general help
options that may be used with this
utility.
[raidcfg]
Version 2.4
Help: options in <> are mandatory
options in [] are optional and can be
in any order after mandatory ones.
raidcfg <controller>
raidcfg <-ctrl>
Lists all controllers on the host and
select property information.
...
—output continues, listing all possible
option/parameter/argument combinations—
134 RAIDCFG
Enumerating RAID Controllers
Table 4-3 lists the RAIDCFG options, parameters, and pre-defined arguments
for enumerating RAID controllers.
Table 4-3. Enumerating RAID Controllers
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Paramet
ers
Valid
Parameters
Arguments
Description
-ctrl
or
controller
NA NA Lists all the RAID controllers on the host
system, along with select property information.
This option is mandatory.
Example:
Controller_ID/Slot_ID: 0
Controller_PCI_ID: 2:14:0
Controller_Name: PERC 4e/Di
Channels: 2
No.of Virtual_Disks: 1
Array_Disks:
0:0:0,1:2:0,1:3:0,1:4:0,1:5:0
Firmware Version: 513O
Controller_ID/Slot_ID: 3
Controller_PCI_ID: 3:11:0
Controller_Name: PERC 4/DC
Channels: 2
No.of Virtual_Disks: 0
Firmware Version: 350O
RAIDCFG Command successful!
RAIDCFG 135
-c
or
controlle
rid
<valid
controller
ID
number>
Displays the properties for the RAID controller
with the specified controller ID. This option
combination is mandatory.
Example:
A:>raidcfg -ctrl -c=2
Controller_ID/Slot_ID: 2
Controller_PCI_ID: 8:14:0
Controller_Name: PERC 4e/DC
Channels: 2
Virtual_Disks: 1
Firmware Version: 521S
RAIDCFG Command successful!
Table 4-3. Enumerating RAID Controllers (continued)
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Paramet
ers
Valid
Parameters
Arguments
Description
136 RAIDCFG
Creating Virtual Disks
Table 4-4 lists the RAIDCFG options, parameters, and pre-defined arguments
for creating virtual disks.
NOTE: If you create a virtual disk on Windows PE, you need to reboot your system.
NOTE: On CERC SATA 1.5/2S, CERC SATA 1.5/6CH, SAS 5/iR, and SAS 6/iR
controllers, use the entire array disk to create a virtual disk.
Table 4-4. Creating Virtual Disks
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameters
Valid Parameter
Arguments
Description
-ctrl -ac=cvd
-c=id -ad=
ch:targ,ch:targ,
...
[or
ch:targ:encl,...]
or
controller
action=
createvdisk
controllerid=
id adisk=
channel:target:
lun,...
channel:target:
lun,...
[or
channel:target:
enclosure,...]
NA NA Creates a virtual disk comprising the
properties supplied. This option
combination is mandatory.
For SCSI controllers, the value of lun
should always be 0.
For SAS controllers, the value of
enclosure can be non-zero, in which
case you need to specify values
for channel, target, and enclosure.
Example:
A:>raidcfg -ctrl -ac=cvd -
c=2
-ad=1:4,1:8 -r=1 -ssz=32 -
cp=d -rp=nra
-wp=wt -fd=1:1
RAIDCFG command successful!
RAIDCFG 137
-cp
or
cachepolicy
d, c Sets the cache policy for the virtual
disk. The valid arguments are:
d — (Direct I/O) Reads are not
buffered in cache memory.
c — (Cache I/O) All reads are buffered
in cache memory.
NOTE: This option is not supported on
the following controllers: CERC SATA
1.5/6 CH, CERC SATA 1.5/2S, and PERC
3/Di.
NOTE: The PERC 4/IM controller has a
fixed set of read, write, and cache
policies. If you set any of these policies
while creating a virtual disk, your
settings will be ignored.
The -cp option is optional and can
be added to the command line in
any order after the mandatory
option combination.
For SCSI controllers, the value of lun
should always be 0.
For SAS controllers, the value of
enclosure can be non-zero, in which
case you need to specify values for
channel, target, and enclosure.
Table 4-4. Creating Virtual Disks (continued)
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameters
Valid Parameter
Arguments
Description
138 RAIDCFG
-fd
or
failoverdrive
ch:targ, ch:targ,
...
or ch:targ:lun,...
or ch:targ:enc
channel:target,
or
channel:target:l
un, or
channel:target:
enclosure
Sets the failover drive for the virtual
disk. The -fd option is optional and can
be added to the command line in any
order after the mandatory option
combination.
NOTE: From DTK 2.4 onwards, the -fd
option creates dedicated hot spares
instead of global hot spares. For
information about setting global hot
spares, see Table 4-10.
For SCSI controllers, the value of lun
should always be 0.
For SAS controllers, the value of
enclosure can be non-zero, in which
case you need to specify values for
channel, target, and enclosure.
Table 4-4. Creating Virtual Disks (continued)
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameters
Valid Parameter
Arguments
Description
RAIDCFG 139
-r
or
-raid
0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50,
60
Sets the RAID type or level for the
virtual disk.
NOTE: If this option is not specified for
any RAID controller, RAID 0 is taken as
the default.
The valid arguments are:
0 — RAID 0 uses data striping, which
is writing data in equal-sized segments
across the array disks. RAID 0 does not
provide data redundancy.
1 — RAID 1 is the simplest form of
maintaining redundant data. In RAID
1, data is mirrored or duplicated on
one or more drives.
5 — RAID 5 provides data redundancy
by using data striping in combination
with parity information. Rather than
dedicating a drive to parity, the parity
information is striped across all disks in
the array.
6 — RAID 6 is an extension of RAID 5
and uses an additional parity block. It
uses block-level striping with two
parity blocks distributed across all
member disks. RAID 6 provides
protection against double disk failures
and failures while a single disk is
rebuilding. In case there is only one
array, RAID 6 may be a better option
than a hotspare disk.
10 — RAID 10 is a stripe of mirrors.
Multiple RAID 1 mirrors are created,
and a RAID 0 stripe is created
over these.
Table 4-4. Creating Virtual Disks (continued)
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameters
Valid Parameter
Arguments
Description
140 RAIDCFG
50 — RAID 50 is a dual level array that
uses multiple RAID 5 sets in a single
array. A single hard drive failure can
occur in each of the RAID 5 without
any loss of data on the entire array.
Although the RAID 50 has increased
write performance, when a hard drive
fails and reconstruction takes place,
performance decreases, data/program
access is slower, and transfer speeds on
the array are affected.
60 — RAID 60 is a combination of
RAID 6 and RAID 0. A RAID 0 array is
striped across RAID 6 elements. It
requires at least 8 disks.
Table 4-4. Creating Virtual Disks (continued)
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameters
Valid Parameter
Arguments
Description
RAIDCFG 141
-ctrl -ac=cvd
-c=id -ad=
ch:targ,ch:targ,
...
[or
ch:targ:encl,...]
or
controller
action=
createvdisk
controllerid=
id adisk=
channel:target:
lun,
channel:target:
lun,...
[or
channel:target:
enclosure,...]
-rp
or
readpolicy
ra, ara, nra, rc,
nrc
Sets the SCSI read policy for the
virtual disk. Specify the SCSI read
policy for the logical drive. The valid
arguments are:
ra — (read-ahead) The controller reads
sequential sectors of the disk when
seeking data.
ara — (Adaptive Read-Ahead)
The controller initiates read-ahead
only if the two most recent read
requests accessed sequential sectors of
the disk. If subsequent read requests
access random sectors of the disk, the
controller reverts to No-Read-Ahead
policy. The controller continues to
evaluate whether or not read requests
are accessing sequential sectors of the
disk and can initiate read-ahead if
necessary.
nra — (No-Read-Ahead) The
controller does not read sequential
sectors of the disk when seeking data.
NOTE: The ra, ara, and nra options are
supported on the following RAID
controllers only:
•PERC 3/DC, PERC 3/QC, PERC
3/Di, PERC 3/SC
•PERC4/SC, PERC 4/DC, PERC
4/Di, PERC 4/IM, PERC4e/DC,
PERC 4e/Di, PERC 4e/Si
•PERC 5/E Adapter, PERC 5/I
Integrated, PERC 5/i Adapter
•PERC 6/i Integrated, PERC 6/i
Adapter, PERC 6/E Adapter
Table 4-4. Creating Virtual Disks (continued)
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameters
Valid Parameter
Arguments
Description
142 RAIDCFG
NOTE: The PERC 4/IM controller has a
fixed set of read, write, and cache
policies. If you set any of these policies
while creating a virtual disk, your
settings will be ignored.
rc — (Read-Caching) Enables read
caching.
nrc — (No-Read-Caching) Disables
read caching.
NOTE: The rc and nrc options are
supported on the following RAID
controllers only: CERC SATA 1.5/CH and
PERC 3/Di.
The -rp option is optional and can
be added to the command line in
any order after the mandatory
option combination.
CAUTION: If the controller is
changed from SCSI to RAID mode,
expect data loss to occur. Back
up any data you want to save
before changing the modes.
Table 4-4. Creating Virtual Disks (continued)
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameters
Valid Parameter
Arguments
Description
RAIDCFG 143
-ctrl -ac=cvd
-c=id -ad=
ch:targ,ch:targ,
...
[or
ch:targ:encl,...]
or
controller
action=
createvdisk
controllerid=
id adisk=
channel:target:
lun,...
channel:target:
lun,...
[or
channel:target:
enclosure,...]
-sp
or
spanlength
<number> Creates a virtual disk comprised of the
properties supplied. The -sp option is
optional and can be the added to the
command line in any order after the
mandatory option combination.
NOTE: Spanlength is applicable only for
RAID 50 and RAID 60. The minimum
permissible spanlength value for RAID
50 is 3 and for RAID 60 is 4. The number
of array disks for creating a virtual disk
should not be a prime number and
should be divisible by the specified
spanlength.
For SCSI controllers, the value of lun
should always be 0.
For SAS controllers, the value of
enclosure can be non-zero, in which
case you need to specify values for
channel, target, and enclosure.
Table 4-4. Creating Virtual Disks (continued)
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameters
Valid Parameter
Arguments
Description
144 RAIDCFG
-ctrl -ac=cvd
-c=id -ad=
ch:targ,ch:targ,
...
[or
ch:targ:encl,...]
or
controller
action=
createvdisk
controllerid=
id adisk=
channel:target:
lun,
channel:target:
lun,...
[or
channel:target:
enclosure,...]
-ssz
or
stripesize
<number> Sets the stripe size for the virtual disk.
The stripe size is the amount of array
disk space used on each array disk
included in the stripe. A valid
argument is a number that is less than
the size of the virtual disk. The -ssz
option is optional and can be added to
the command line in any order after
the mandatory option combination.
However, do not specify a unit for
stripe size when creating virtual disks.
The unit is always displayed in KB.
For SCSI controllers, the value of lun
should always be 0.
For SAS controllers, the value of
enclosure can be non-zero, in which
case you need to specify values for
channel, target, and enclosure.
Table 4-4. Creating Virtual Disks (continued)
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameters
Valid Parameter
Arguments
Description
RAIDCFG 145
-ctrl -ac=cvd
-c=id -ad=
ch:targ,ch:targ
,...
[or
ch:targ:encl,...]
or
controller
action=
createvdisk
controllerid=
id adisk=
channel:target:
lun,
channel:target:
lun,...
[or
channel:target:
enclosure,...]
-str
or
strict
<number> Strict (-str parameter) is the
percentage of expected array disk
utilization.
Example:
A:> raidcfg -ctrl -ac=
cvd -c=0 -ad=0:0,0:1 -r=
1 -str=20
If the unused portion of an array disk is
greater than the above percent, raidcfg
will abort.
For SCSI controllers, the value of lun
should always be 0.
For SAS controllers, the value of
enclosure can be non-zero, in which
case you need to specify values for
channel, target, and enclosure.
Table 4-4. Creating Virtual Disks (continued)
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameters
Valid Parameter
Arguments
Description
146 RAIDCFG
-ctrl -ac=cvd
-c=id -ad=
ch:targ,ch:targ,
...
[or
ch:targ:encl,...]
or
controller
action=
createvdisk
controllerid=
id adisk=
channel:target:
lun,...
channel:target:
lun,...
[or
channel:target:
enclosure,...]
-sz
or
-size
<number> Sets the maximum size of the virtual
disk in MB or GB. A valid argument is
a number representing the maximum
size for the virtual disk. The -sz option
is optional and can be the added to the
command line in any order after the
mandatory option combination.
The minimum virtual disk size that
you can create for various controllers is
given below.
• For CERC-SATA 1.5/6ch
controllers:
RAID 0: 10MB
RAID 1: 9MB
RAID 5: 9MB
• For PERC 3 controllers:
RAID 0: 10MB
RAID 1: 10MB
RAID 5: 10MB
• For PERC 4 (except PERC 4/IM)
controllers:
RAID 0: 10MB
RAID 1: 10MB
RAID 5: 10MB
Table 4-4. Creating Virtual Disks (continued)
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameters
Valid Parameter
Arguments
Description
RAIDCFG 147
• For PERC 5 controllers:
RAID 0: 100MB
RAID 1: 100MB
RAID 5: 100MB
• For PERC 6 controllers:
RAID 0: 100MB
RAID 1: 100MB
RAID 5: 100MB
RAID 6: 100MB
RAID 60: 100MB
NOTE: If this option is not provided,
RAIDCFG will determine the maximum
possible virtual disk size and create it.
RAID 10, RAID 50, and RAID 60 do
not accept this option.
Table 4-4. Creating Virtual Disks (continued)
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameters
Valid Parameter
Arguments
Description
148 RAIDCFG
-wp
or
writepolicy
wb, wt, wc, nwc Sets the write policy for the virtual
disk. The valid arguments are:
wb — (Write-Back Caching) sets the
controller to send a write-request
completion signal as soon as the data is
in the controller cache but has not yet
been written to disk.
wt — (Write-Through Caching) sets
the controller to send a write-request
completion signal only after the data is
written to the disk.
NOTE: The wb and wt options are
supported on the following RAID
controllers only:
•PERC 3/DC, PERC 3/QC, PERC
3/Di, PERC 3/SC
•PERC 4/IM, PERC 4/SC, PERC
4/Di, PERC 4/DC, PERC 4e/DC,
and PERC 4e/Di
•PERC 5/E Adapter, PERC 5/I
Integrated, PERC 5/i Adapter
•PERC 6/i Integrated, PERC 6/i
Adapter, PERC 6/E Adapter
NOTE: The PERC 4/IM controller has a
fixed set of read, write, and cache
policies. If you set any of these policies
while creating a virtual disk, your
settings will be ignored.
wc — (Write-Caching) sets the
controller to send a write-request
completion signal only after the data is
written to the disk.
Table 4-4. Creating Virtual Disks (continued)
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameters
Valid Parameter
Arguments
Description
RAIDCFG 149
nwc — (No-Write-Caching) specifies
that the controller does not send a
write-request completion signal after
the data is written to the disk.
NOTE: The wc and nwc options are
supported on the following RAID
controllers only: CERC SATA 1.5/CH and
PERC 3/Di.
The -wp option is optional and can be
added to the command line in any order
after the mandatory option
combination.
For SCSI controllers, the value of lun
should always be 0.
For SAS controllers, the value of
enclosure can be non-zero, in which
case you need to specify values for
channel, target, and enclosure.
Table 4-4. Creating Virtual Disks (continued)
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameters
Valid Parameter
Arguments
Description
150 RAIDCFG
Enumerating Array Disks
Table 4-5 lists the RAIDCFG options, parameters, and pre-defined arguments
for enumerating array disks (hard drives).
Table 4-5. Enumerating Array Disks (Hard Drives)
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameter
Valid
Parameter
Arguments
Description
-ad -c=id
or
adisk
controllerid=
id
NA NA Lists all the array disks attached to the
specified RAID controller. This option
combination is mandatory.
NOTE: You can also use pdisk or -pd
instead of adisk or -ad to specify an array
disk.
Example:
A:>raidcfg -ad -c=2
Controller: PERC 4e/DC
****** Physical Drive ******
Drive Vendor: FUJITSU
Drive Model: MAP3367NC
Drive Location: 0:0:0
Drive Size: 34680 MB
Drive Avail: 0 MB
****** Physical Drive ******
Drive Vendor: SEAGATE
Drive Model: ST336607LC
Drive Location: 0:1:0
Drive Size: 34680 MB
Drive Avail: 0 MB
RAIDCFG 151
****** Physical Drive ******
Drive Vendor: FUJITSU
Drive Model: MAP3367NC
Drive Location: 0:2:0
Drive Size: 34680 MB
Drive Avail: 34680 MB
****** Physical Drive ******
Drive Vendor: SEAGATE
Drive Model: ST336607LC
Drive Location: 0:3:0
Drive Size: 34680 MB
Drive Avail: 34680 MB
****** Physical Drive ******
Drive Vendor: SEAGATE
Drive Model: ST373405LC
Drive Location: 0:4:0
Drive Size: 69880 MB
Drive Avail: 69880 MB
****** Physical Drive ******
Drive Vendor: SEAGATE
Drive Model: ST318453LC
Drive Location: 0:5:0
Drive Size: 17280 MB
Drive Avail: 17280 MB
Table 4-5. Enumerating Array Disks (Hard Drives) (continued)
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameter
Valid
Parameter
Arguments
Description
152 RAIDCFG
RAIDCFG Command successful!
****** Physical Drive ******
Drive Vendor: FUJITSU
Drive Model: MAN3367MC
Drive Location: 1:2:0
Drive Size: 34678MB
Drive Avail: 34678MB
****** Physical Drive ******
Drive Vendor: FUJITSU
Drive Model: MAN3367MC
Drive Location: 1:4:0
Drive Size: 34678MB
Drive Avail: 24438MB
RAIDCFG command successful!
Table 4-5. Enumerating Array Disks (Hard Drives) (continued)
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameter
Valid
Parameter
Arguments
Description
RAIDCFG 153
-ad -c=id
or
adisk
controllerid=
id
-vd=id
vdisk=id
<valid
virtual
disk>
Lists the array disks that make up the
virtual disk on the specified RAID
controller. This option combination is
mandatory.
Example:
A:>raidcfg -ad -c=2 -vd=0
Controller: PERC 4e/DC
Drive Vendor: FUJITSU
Drive Model: MAP3367NC
Drive Location: 0:0:0
Drive Size: 34680 MB
Drive Avail: 0 MB
****** Physical Drive ******
Drive Vendor: SEAGATE
Drive Model: ST336607LC
Drive Location: 0:1:0
Drive Size: 34680 MB
Drive Avail: 0 MB
RAIDCFG Command successful!
Table 4-5. Enumerating Array Disks (Hard Drives) (continued)
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameter
Valid
Parameter
Arguments
Description
154 RAIDCFG
-ad -c=id
or
adisk
controllerid=
id vdisk=id
-ad=
ch:targ,ch:t
arg,...
adisk=
channel:tar
get,
channel:tar
get,...
<valid
array disk>
<valid
array disk>
Displays information about the specified
array disk. This option combination is
mandatory.
Example:
A:>raidcfg -ad -c=2 -ad=
0:1,0:2
Controller: PERC 4e/DC
****** Physical Drive ******
Drive Vendor: SEAGATE
Drive Model: ST336607LC
Drive Location: 0:1:0
Drive Size: 34680 MB
Drive Avail: 0 MB
****** Physical Drive ******
Drive Vendor: FUJITSU
Drive Model: MAP3367NC
Drive Location: 0:2:0
Drive Size: 34680 MB
Drive Avail: 34680 MB
RAIDCFG Command successful!
Table 4-5. Enumerating Array Disks (Hard Drives) (continued)
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameter
Valid
Parameter
Arguments
Description
RAIDCFG 155
Enumerating Virtual Disks
Table 4-6 lists the RAIDCFG options, parameters, and pre-defined arguments
for enumerating virtual disks.
Table 4-6. Enumerating Virtual Disks
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameter
Valid
Parameter
Arguments
Description
-vd
or
vdisk
NA NA Lists the virtual disks for each controller
along with the array disks that make up each
virtual disk. This option is mandatory.
Example:
A:>raidcfg -vd
Controller: PERC 4e/DC
Virtual disk not found
Controller: PERC 4e/DC
VDisk ID: 0
Size: 34680 MB
Type: RAID 1
Read Policy: Normal Read Ahead
Write Policy: Writeback
Cache Policy: Direct_IO
Drives: 0:0:0,0:1:0
Controller: PERC 4/SC
Virtual disk not found
Controller: PERC 4/SC
Virtual disk not found
RAIDCFG Command successful!
156 RAIDCFG
-vd
or
vdisk
-c
or
controller
id
<valid
controller ID
number>
Lists all the virtual disks under the
indicated controllers. Each virtual disk is
displayed with the physical disk that
comprises it. The -c option is optional and
can be added to the command line in any
order after the mandatory option.
Example:
A:>raidcfg -vd -c=2
Controller: PERC 4e/DC
VDisk ID: 0
Size: 34680 MB
Type: RAID 1
Read Policy: Normal Read Ahead
Write Policy: Writeback
Cache Policy: Direct_IO
Drives: 0:0:0,0:1:0
RAIDCFG Command successful!
Table 4-6. Enumerating Virtual Disks (continued)
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameter
Valid
Parameter
Arguments
Description
RAIDCFG 157
-vd -c=id
or
vdisk
controllerid=
id
-vd
or
vdisk
<valid
virtual disk
ID
number>
Displays details about a single virtual disk
under the indicated controller. The -vd -c=
id option combination is mandatory. The
second -vd option is optional and can be
added to the command line in any order
after the mandatory option combination.
Example:
A:>raidcfg -vd -c=2 -vd=0
Controller: PERC 4e/DC
VDisk ID: 0
Size: 34680 MB
Type: RAID 1
Read Policy: Normal Read Ahead
Write Policy: Writeback
Cache Policy: Direct_IO
Drives: 0:0:0,0:1:0
Dedicated HS: 1:2:0
RAIDCFG Command successful!
Table 4-6. Enumerating Virtual Disks (continued)
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameter
Valid
Parameter
Arguments
Description
158 RAIDCFG
Initializing Virtual Disks
Table 4-7 lists the RAIDCFG options, parameters, and pre-defined arguments
for initializing selected virtual disks.
Table 4-7. Initializing Virtual Disks
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameters
Valid
Parameter
Arguments
Description
-vd -c=id -
vd=id -ac=fi
or
vdisk
controllerid=
id vdisk=id
action=
fastinit
NA <valid virtual
disk ID
number>
This option initializes the selected
virtual disk in the selected controller
with the fastinit command. This feature
is supported on PERC 5 and later
controllers and is not supported on SAS
controllers.
Using the fastinit command on
unsupported controllers returns an error.
Example:
A:>raidcfg -vd -c=2 -vd=2 -
ac=fi
-vd -c=id -
vd=id -ac=
sli
or
vdisk
controllerid=
id vdisk=id
action=
slowinit
NA <valid virtual
disk ID
number>
This option initializes the selected
virtual disk in the selected controller
with the slowinit command. This
feature is supported on PERC 5 and
later controllers and is not supported on
SAS controllers. Using the slowinit
command on unsupported controllers
returns an error.
Example:
A:>raidcfg -vd -c=2 -vd=2 -
ac=sli
RAIDCFG 159
Importing and Clearing Foreign Configurations
Table 4-8 lists the RAIDCFG options, parameters, and pre-defined arguments
for foreign configurations.
Table 4-8. RAIDCFG Options for Foreign Configurations
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameters
Valid Parameter
Arguments
Description
-ctrl -c=id -ac=
fgnimp
or
controller
controllerid=id
action=
foreignimport
NA <valid virtual
disk ID
number>
Imports the foreign configuration
detected in the selected controller.
This feature is supported on PERC
5 and later controllers and is not
supported on SAS controllers.
If you use this argument on a
controller that does not have a
foreign configuration, the "No
Foreign configuration present in
the controller" message is
displayed.
Example:
A:>raidcfg -ctrl -c=2 -
ac=fgnimp
-ctrl -c=id -ac=
fgnclr
or
controller
controllerid=id
action=
foreignclear
NA <valid virtual
disk ID
number>
Clears the foreign configuration
detected in the selected controller.
This feature is supported on PERC
5 and later controllers and is not
supported on SAS controllers.
If you use this argument on a
controller that does not have a
foreign configuration, the "No
Foreign configuration present in
the controller" message is
displayed.
Example:
A:>raidcfg -ctrl -c=2 -
ac=fgnclr
160 RAIDCFG
Deleting Virtual Disks
Table 4-9 lists the RAIDCFG options, parameters, and pre-defined arguments
for deleting virtual disks.
NOTE: If you delete a virtual disk on PERC 4/IM on Windows PE, you need to reboot
the system.
-ctrl -c=id -ac=
fgnrvr
or
controller
controllerid=id
action=
foreignrecover
NA <valid virtual
disk ID
number>
Recovers the foreign configuration
detected in the selected controller.
This feature is supported from the
PERC 5 and later controllers and is
not supported on SAS controllers.
If you use this argument on a
controller that has no foreign
configuration, the "No Foreign
configuration present in the
controller" message is displayed.
Example:
A:>raidcfg -ctrl -c=2 -
ac=fgnrvr
Table 4-8. RAIDCFG Options for Foreign Configurations (continued)
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameters
Valid Parameter
Arguments
Description
RAIDCFG 161
NOTE: When virtual disks are being created, the RAID controller starts the
background initialization operation. Virtual disks cannot be deleted until this
operation completes. This limitation affects mostly PERC 3/Di and CERC SATA
controllers.
NOTE: If the raid.ini file contains the [Reset] section, then the RAIDCFG utility
removes all the hot spares (dedicated and global) and virtual disks on the specified
RAID controllers in the system.
Table 4-9. Deleting Virtual Disks
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameter
Valid
Parameter
Arguments
Description
-vd -ac=dvd -
c=id
or
vdisk
action=
deletevdisk
controllerid=
id
NA NA Deletes all virtual disks on the indicated
controller. This option combination is
mandatory.
Example:
A:>raidcfg -vd -ac=dvd -c=2
RAIDCFG command successful!
-vd -ac=dvd -
c=id
or
vdisk
action=
deletevdisk
controllerid=
id
-vd
or
vdisk
<valid
virtual disk
ID
number>
Deletes the indicated virtual disk on the
indicated controller. The -vd -ac=dvd -c=id
option combination is mandatory.
The second -vd option is optional and can be
added to the command line in any order
after the mandatory option.
Example:
A:>raidcfg -vd -ac=dvd -c=2 -
vd=0
RAIDCFG command successful!
162 RAIDCFG
Assigning and Unassigning Global Hot Spares
Table 4-10 lists the RAIDCFG options, parameters, and pre-defined
arguments for assigning and unassigning global hot spares.
Table 4-10. Assigning and Unassigning Global Hot Spares
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameter
Valid
Parameter
Arguments
Description
-ctrl -ac=
sghs -c=id -
ad|-pd=
ch:targ:encl,c
h:targ:encl
NA NA Assigns the specified disks as global hot
spares on the specified controller.
Example:
A:>raidcfg -ctrl -ac=sghs -c=2
-ad=0:1,0:2
RAIDCFG command successful!
-ctrl ac=rghs
-c=id -ad|-
pd=
ch:targ:encl,c
h:targ:encl
NA NA Unassigns all global hot spares to disks on
the specified controller.
Example:
A:>raidcfg -ctrl -ac=rghs -c=2
RAIDCFG command successful!
RAIDCFG 163
Setting Environment Variables
Table 4-11 lists the RAIDCFG options, parameters, and pre-defined
arguments for setting the CLI environment.
Table 4-11. Setting Environment
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameter
Valid
Parameter
Arguments
Description
-se -envn=
<string> -
envc=
<function>
or
setenvironmen
t envname=
<string>
envcommand
=<function>
NA NA Sets a user-defined environment variable to
the value returned from the
getcontrollerslots function call.
This option combination is mandatory.
Example:
A:>raidcfg -se -envn=CNTRL -
envc=getcontrollerslots
CNTRL=0 1 2
RAIDCFG command successful!
-se -envn=
<string> -
envc=
<function>
or
setenvironmen
t envname=
<string>
envcommand
=<function>
-f
or
filename
<filename
>
When used, this option captures the
environment output to the given filename.
This option either appends the information
to an existing file or creates a new file.
164 RAIDCFG
-se -envn=
<string> -
envc=
<function> -
c=id
or
setenvironmen
t envname=
<string>
envcommand
=<function>
controllerid=
id
NA NA Sets a user-defined environment variable to
the value returned from the getfirmware,
getcontrollertype, getadisks,
getadiskcount, getfreeadisks,
getfreeadiskcount,
getfreeadisksize, or gethotspares
function call. This option combination is
mandatory.
Example:
A:>raidcfg -se -envn=FIRMWARE -
envc=getfirmware -c=2
FIRMWARE=531T
RAIDCFG command successful!
Table 4-11. Setting Environment (continued)
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameter
Valid
Parameter
Arguments
Description
RAIDCFG 165
Table 4-12 lists the function calls of the setenvironment option.
Table 4-12. Function Calls of the setenvironment Option
Function Call Description
getfirmware Returns the firmware version of the specified controllers.
Example:
A:>raidcfg -se -envn=FIRMWARE -envc=
getfirmware -c=2
FIRMWARE=531T
RAIDCFG command successful!
getcontrollertype Returns LSI for LSI controllers and ADAP for Adaptec
controllers.
Example:
A:>raidcfg -se -envn=CONTROLLERTYPE -envc=
getcontrollertype -c=2
CONTROLLERTYPE=LSI
RAIDCFG command successful!
getadisks Returns the array disks attached to the controller.
Example:
A:>raidcfg -se -envn=ADISKS -envc=getadisks -
c=2
ADISKS=0:0:1,0:1:1,0:2:1
RAIDCFG command successful!
166 RAIDCFG
getfreeadiskcount Returns the number of free array disks found in the specified
controller.
Example:
A:>raidcfg -se -envn=FREEADISKCOUNT -envc=
getfreeadiskcount -c=2
FREEADISKCOUNT=2
RAIDCFG command successful!
getfreeadisksize Returns the total size of the free array disks in megabytes.
Example:
A:>raidcfg -se -envn=FREEADISKSIZE -envc=
getfreeadisksize -c=2
FREEADISKSIZE=15346
RAIDCFG command successful!
gethotspares Returns the global hot spares (global failover disks) found on the
specified controller.
Example:
A:>raidcfg -se -envn=HOTSPARES -envc=
gethotspares -c=2
HOTSPARES=1:8:1,1:9:1
RAIDCFG command successful!
Table 4-12. Function Calls of the setenvironment Option (continued)
Function Call Description
RAIDCFG 167
getfreeadisks Returns the free array disks.
A:>raidcfg -se -envn=GETFREEADISKS -envc=
getfreeadisks -c=2
GETFREEADISKS=0:3:1,0:4:1
RAIDCFG command successful!
getadiskcount Returns the total number of array disks.
A:>raidcfg -se -envn=GETADISKCOUNT -envc=
getadiskcount -c=2
GETADISKCOUNT=1
RAIDCFG command successful!
Table 4-12. Function Calls of the setenvironment Option (continued)
Function Call Description
168 RAIDCFG
RAID Replication Options
Table 4-13 lists the RAID replication options.
Table 4-13. RAID Replication Options
Mandatory
Options
and
Arguments
Optional
Parameters
Valid
Parameter
Arguments
Description
-i NA <filename> Reads the RAID configuration information
from the given .ini filename and creates the
RAID configurations on the specified
controllers. This option is mandatory.
Example:
A:> raidcfg -i=\tmp\raid.ini
-o NA <filename> Reads the RAID configurations from all
available controllers and writes these
configurations in the raid.ini file under the
/tmp directory (in Linux systems). This option
is mandatory.
Example:
A:> raidcfg -o=\tmp\raid.ini
The contents of the raid.ini
file are:
[vdisk0]
controllerid=0
size=123456
raid=5
readpolicy=ra
writepolicy=wt
stripesize=32
cachepolicy=d
adisk=0:0:1,0:1:1,0:2:1
[vdisk1]
RAIDCFG 169
controllerid=0
size=65345
raid=1
readpolicy=ra
writepolicy=wt
stripesize=64
cachepolicy=d
adisk=0:3:1,0:4:1
If the controller uses global hot spares, the
raid.ini file contains the following section:
[GlobalHotspare0]
controllerid=0
failoverdrive=0:8:0
Table 4-13. RAID Replication Options (continued)
Mandatory
Options
and
Arguments
Optional
Parameters
Valid
Parameter
Arguments
Description
170 RAIDCFG
Miscellaneous Options
Table 4-14 lists all other RAIDCFG options, parameters, and pre-defined
arguments.
Table 4-14. Miscellaneous Optional Parameters
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameter
Valid
Parameter
Arguments
Description
any -l
or
logfile
<filename> Logs command line output to a file. The
utility either appends the information to an
existing log file or creates a new file. The log
file contains the same information as
standard output. This option is optional and
can be added to the command line in any
order after the mandatory options have been
added.
Example:
A:>raidcfg -ctrl -l=log.txt
Controller_ID/Slot_ID: 0
Controller_PCI_ID: 4:2:1
Controller_Name: Dell PERC
3/Di
Channels: 2
Virtual_Disks: 0
Firmware Version: V2.8-
0[6064]
Controller_ID/Slot_ID: 2
Controller_PCI_ID: 2:0:0
Controller_Name: PERC 3/DC
Channels: 2
Virtual_Disks: 0
Firmware Version: 1.74
RAIDCFG command successful!
RAIDCFG 171
any -si
or
silent
NA Does not display any information on the
terminal console. This option is optional and
can be added to the command line in any
order after any mandatory options have been
added.
Example:
A:>raidcfg -ctrl -si
RAIDCFG command successful!
any -ver
or
version
NA Displays the version number of the
RAIDCFG utility. This option is optional and
can be added to the command line in
any order after any mandatory options have
been added.
Example:
A:>raidcfg -ver
RAIDCFG V2.4
Copyright (c) 2005-2007 Dell
Inc.
RAIDCFG Command successful!
Table 4-14. Miscellaneous Optional Parameters (continued)
Mandatory
Options and
Arguments
Optional
Parameter
Valid
Parameter
Arguments
Description
172 RAIDCFG
Quick Reference to RAIDCFG Commands
Table 4-15 lists the basic RAIDCFG commands.
Table 4-15. Basic RAIDCFG Commands
Purpose Command Description
To list all the RAID
controllers in a system
raidcfg -ctrl Lists all the RAID controllers in
the system.
Note the slot ID of the controllers.
You will need it for all the other
commands.
To list all the disks
attached to a particular
controller
raidcfg adisk -
c=slotid
Lists all the disks attached to the
controller. The slot ID is obtained
from the first command.
Note the drive location of the
disks. You will need this
information later.
To create a virtual disk
with all the default
settings
raidcfg -ctrl -
ac=cvd -c=
slotid -ad=
x:y,x:y,...
Creates a virtual disk of maximum
available size for type RAID 0.
RAID 0 is the default.
The slot ID in <-c=slotid> and
the array disks in <-ad=...> are
obtained from the first two
commands.
To create a virtual disk
of a certain size with all
the default settings
raidcfg -ctrl -
ac=cvd -c=
slotid -ad=
x:y,x:y,... -
sz=5GB
Creates a virtual disk of 5GB size
for type RAID 0. RAID 0 is the
default.
The slot ID in <-c=slotid> and
the array disks in <-ad=...> are
obtained from the first two
commands.
To create a virtual disk
of a certain size and
make it RAID 1
raidcfg -ctrl -
ac=cvd -c=
slotid -ad=
x:y,x:y -sz=5GB
-r=1
Creates a virtual disk of 5GB size
for type RAID 1.
The slot ID in <-c=slotid> and
the array disks in <-ad=...> are
obtained from the first two
commands.
RAIDCFG 173
To create a virtual disk
of a certain size and
make it RAID 5
raidcfg -ctrl -
ac=cvd -c=
slotid -ad=
x:y,x:y,x:y,...
-sz=5GB -r=5
Creates a virtual disk of 5GB size
for type RAID 5.
The slot ID in <-c=slotid> and
the array disks in <-ad=...> are
obtained from the first two
commands.
To create a virtual disk
of a certain size and
make it RAID 1 with a
hot spare
raidcfg -ctrl -
ac=cvd -c=
slotid -ad=
x:y,x:y -sz=5GB
-r=1 -fd=x:y
Creates a virtual disk of 5GB size
for type RAID 1.
The slot ID in <-c=slotid>
and the array disks in <-ad=...>
are obtained from the first two
commands.
The option <-fd> stands for
failover drive and requires the drive
location of the drive you want the
dedicated hot spare to be in. The
drive location is obtained from the
second command.
To create a virtual disk
of RAID 10
raidcfg -ctrl -
ac=cvd -c=
slotid -ad=
x:y,x:y,x:y,x:y
-r=10
Creates a virtual disk of max size
for type RAID 10.
The slot ID in<-c=slotid> and
the array disks in <-ad=...> are
obtained from the first two
commands. The drive location is
obtained from the second
command.
To create a virtual disk
of RAID 50
raidcfg -ctrl -
ac=cvd -c=
slotid -ad=
x:y,x:y,x:y,x:y
,x:y,x:y -r=50
-sp=x
Creates a virtual disk of maximum
size for type RAID 50.
The slot ID in <-c=slotid> and
the array disks in <-ad=...> are
obtained from the first two
commands. The drive location is
obtained from the second
command.
Table 4-15. Basic RAIDCFG Commands (continued)
Purpose Command Description
174 RAIDCFG
To create a virtual disk
of RAID 6
raidcfg -ctrl -
ac=cvd -c=
slotid -ad=
x:y,x:y,x:y,x:y
,x:y,x:y -r=6 -
sp=x
Creates a virtual disk of maximum
size for type RAID 6.
The slot ID in <-c=slotid> and
the array disks in <-ad=...> are
obtained from the first two
commands. The drive location is
obtained from the second
command.
NOTE: The minimum number of
drives required to create a virtual
disk of RAID 6 is 4.
To create a virtual disk
of RAID 60
raidcfg -ctrl -
ac=cvd -c=
slotid -ad=
x:y,x:y,x:y,x:y
,x:y,x:y -r=60
-sp=x
Creates a virtual disk of maximum
size for type RAID 60.
The slot ID in <-c=slotid> and
the array disks in <-ad=...> are
obtained from the first two
commands. The drive location is
obtained from the second
command.
NOTE: The minimum number of
drives required to create a virtual
disk of RAID 60 is 8.
To view all the virtual
disks in a system
raidcfg vdisk Lists the virtual disks on a system
for all RAID controllers.
To view all the virtual
disks for a specific
controller
raidcfg vdisk -
c=slotid
Lists all the virtual disks on a
specific controller.
The slot ID in <-c=slotid> is
obtained from the first command.
To delete a specific
virtual disk on a
controller
raidcfg vdisk -
ac=dvd -c=
slotid -vd=
vdiskid
Deletes a specific virtual disk on a
controller.
The slot ID in <-c=slotid> is
obtained from the first command
and the vdiskid in
<-vd=vdiskid> is obtained
from command 10.
Table 4-15. Basic RAIDCFG Commands (continued)
Purpose Command Description
UPINIT 175
UPINIT
The UPINIT utility is used to make a utility partition (UP) on a hard drive,
format the partition, and extract the partition contents onto the disk.
Features
The UPINIT utility has the following general features:
• Displays help and usage information.
• Returns specific error codes and messages.
NOTE: In Microsoft® Windows® Preinstallation Environment (Windows PE),
you can find the UPINIT utility in \DELL\TOOLKIT\TEMPLATES\SCRIPTS. In Linux,
you can find it in /opt/dell/toolkit/templates/scripts.
Creating a Partition Using UPINIT
The size of the virtual disk where a utility partition is to be created must be a
minimum of 8 GB.
UPINIT performs the following steps:
• Ensures that the UP image file is present and readable.
• Ensures that no partitions are present on the target disk.
• Creates a utility partition of type Dell Utility (DE)
If there is an existing UP, UPINIT does not create a new one. It only
updates the existing UP. If no UP is found, UPINIT exits.
• Updates the boot sector with the UP boot sector image. If required, it
updates the master boot record as well.
• Mounts the partition.
176 UPINIT
• Uncompresses the UP file onto the UP image.
• Unmounts the partition.
NOTE: On Windows PE, UPINIT runs as a batch file. In Linux, it is a shell script that
uses standard Linux commands to accomplish the same tasks done by the
Windows PE counterpart. Both command lines are identical and the output of the
two utilities will be identical if the same image is used.
UPINIT Dependencies
In Linux, UPINIT looks for the following files:
•
mbr
file in the
dell/drmk
directory
•
sysdrmk
in the
dell/toolkit/bin
directory
In Windows, UPINIT looks for the following files:
•
createup.cfg
,
mountup.cfg
,
umountup.cfg, listup.cfg
in the
DELL\TOOLKIT\TEMPLATE\SCRIPTS
directory
•
sysdrmk.exe
in the
DELL\TOOLKIT\TOOLS
directory
UPINIT Options and Arguments
Table 5-1 lists the valid options and arguments for the UPINIT utility.
UPINIT 177
Table 5-1. UPINIT Options and Arguments
Option Valid
Arguments
Description
none none If no options are given, the tool will output usage
information. The usage information will be printed in
the format shown below.
Example 1:
A:>upinit
upinit version 1.0
© 2005 Dell Inc. All rights reserved
upinit.sh --disk|-d=disk --size|-s=
size --file|-f=file
[--overwrite|-o] [--
help|-h]
--help or -h prints help.
--disk or -d disk device on which to
create the Dell Utility Partition.
--size or -s Size in MB for the Dell
Utility Partition.
--file or -f filename of Dell Utility
Partition Image File.
--overwrite or -o Installs the Dell
Utility partition over an existing
one.
Example 2:
upinit --disk=/dev/sda --size=32 --
file=upimg.bin
In the example, upinit creates a Dell
Utility Partition of size 32 MB on
/dev/sda using upimg.bin file.
NOTE: The --overwrite option should be used for
upgrading/downgrading purposes. The --size option is not
required when using the --overwrite option because the
--overwrite option does not resize an existing Dell™ Utility
Partition. If any partitions exist, they will not be deleted.
178 UPINIT
-h none This function command requires an argument that
matches a valid option. If the argument matches a valid
option, that option’s usage information is displayed.
This option cannot be used with other options.
Windows PE Example:
upinit version 1.0
Copyright (c) 2002-2006 Dell Inc.
This utility creates a utility
partition for your system.
This utility requires a Utility
Partition image file (upimg.bin) which
can be found under
/opt/dell/toolkit/systems folder in
the Deployment Toolkit ISO. For more
information, please consult the
Deployment Toolkit Documentation.
Usage:
upinit.bat [--overwrite] --disk=ID or
-d=ID --size=size or -s=size
--file=file or -f=file
--help or -h prints usage.
--disk or -d ID of the disk on which
to create the Dell Utility Partition.
--size or -s Size in MB for the Dell
Utility Partition.
--file or -f Filename of the Dell
Utility Partition Image File.
--overwrite or -o Overwrites an
existing Dell Utility Partition.
Example:
upinit --disk=0 --size=32 --file=
upimg.bin
Table 5-1. UPINIT Options and Arguments (continued)
Option Valid
Arguments
Description
UPINIT 179
In the example, upinit creates a Dell Utility Partition of
size 32 MB using the upimg.bin image file.
The --overwrite option should be used for
upgrading/downgrading purposes. The --size option is
not required when using the --overwrite option because
the --overwrite option does not resize an existing Dell
Utility Partition. If any partitions exist, they will not be
deleted.
Linux Example:
upinit version 1.0
Copyright (c) 2002-2006 Dell Inc.
This utility creates a utility
partition for your system.
This utility requires a Utility
Partition image file (upimg.bin) which
can be found under
/opt/dell/toolkit/systems folder in
the Deployment Toolkit ISO. For more
information, please consult the
Deployment Toolkit Documentation.
Usage:
upinit.sh --disk|-d=disk --size|-s=
size --file|-f=file
[--overwrite|-o] [--
help|-h]
--help or -h prints help.
--disk or -d disk device on which to
create the Dell Utility Partition.
--size or -s Size in MB for the Dell
Utility Partition.
--file or -f filename of Dell Utility
Partition Image File.
Table 5-1. UPINIT Options and Arguments (continued)
Option Valid
Arguments
Description
180 UPINIT
--overwrite or -o Installs the Dell
Utility partition over an existing
one.
Example:
upinit --disk=/dev/sda --size=32 --
file=upimg.bin
In the example, upinit creates a Dell Utility Partition of
size 32 MB on /dev/sda using the upimg.bin file.
The --overwrite option should be used for
upgrading/downgrading purposes. The --size option is
not required when using the --overwrite option because
the --overwrite option does not resize an existing Dell
Utility Partition. If any partitions exist, they will not be
deleted.
disk integer,
required
(Windows)
string,
required
(Linux)
Specifies the disk on which to create a utility partition.
This disk will be checked to ensure that there are no
existing partitions. Utility will exit with an error if the
disk has partitions other than a utility partition.
Use option --overwrite to overwrite an existing utility
partition.
Example:
A:> upinit --disk=0 --size=32 --file=c:\upimage.bin
(WinPE Example)
# upinit --disk=/dev/hda --size=32 --file=
/home/BIN/upimage.bin (Linux Example)
size integer,
required
The size of the utility partition to create. The created
utility will be at least the size specified by size and be as
close to actual size as drive geometry will allow.
Example:
A:> upinit --disk=0 --size=32 --file=
c:\upimage.bin
Table 5-1. UPINIT Options and Arguments (continued)
Option Valid
Arguments
Description
UPINIT 181
file string,
required
Specifies a file that will be decompressed onto the
utility partition. This file will be checked for existence
and availability before any partitions are created on the
disk. If the file is not specified, the utility will simply
create the utility partition, format it, and exits. It will
be up to the user to mount and populate the utility
partition. It is very unlikely that the user will NOT
specify the utility partition format.
Example:
A:> upinit --disk=0 --size=32 --file=
c:\upimage.bin
--overwrite string,
optional
Overwrites an existing utility partition. It does not
create a new partition or delete an existing partition.
Table 5-1. UPINIT Options and Arguments (continued)
Option Valid
Arguments
Description
182 UPINIT
RACADM 183
RACADM
The RACADM utility provides a scriptable interface that allows you to locally
or remotely configure your remote access controller (RAC).
Using the RACADM utility, you can enter command line options to configure
RAC properties. When you enter command line options, the RACADM
utility sets or retrieves object property values in the RAC properties database.
You can also use the RACADM utility to write scripts that will automatically
configure multiple RACs. For example, when configuring in batch mode, a
series of calls to the RACADM utility can perform actions such as upgrading
RAC firmware, setting a property to a specific value, and reading the
configuration of the RAC. All command switches are case sensitive. For more
information about configuring multiple RACs, see "RAC Configuration File"
in the Dell Remote Access Controller Racadm User's Guide.
CAUTION: Commands and code samples in this section are RAC-specific. Some
commands or samples may not be applicable to your RAC. Also, the -r option for
performing racadm commands remotely is not available for the RACADM utility.
NOTE: In Microsoft® Windows® Preinstallation Environment (Windows PE), you
can find the RACADM utility in \DELL\TOOLKIT\TOOLS. In Linux, you can find it in
/opt/dell/toolkit/bin. The RAC service must be started before issuing racadm
commands. In Linux systems, the RAC service is started by the racsvc3.sh (for
DRAC III, DRAC III/XT, ERA, ERA/O, and ERA/MC RACs) or the racsvc4.sh (for DRAC
4/P and DRAC 4/I RACs) script located at /opt/dell/toolkit/bin. In Windows systems,
the RAC service is called racsvc and is located at \DELL\DRIVERS\RAC 4.
Features
The RAC configuration utility has the following general features:
• Displays help and usage information.
• Configures RAC information.
• Saves RAC configuration information to a configuration file.
• Logs activity to a given filename.
• Returns specific error codes and messages.
184 RACADM
RACADM Options
Table 6-1 lists the options and arguments for the RACADM utility that apply
to deployment. For more information about the valid RACADM options, see
"RAC Configuration Utility Options, Subcommands, and Arguments."
NOTE: Some of the following options or arguments might not be available on all
systems.
Table 6-1. RACADM Options
RACADM Options
and Arguments
RACADM
Subcommands
Short Description
-i NA Tells the RACADM utility to interactively
query the user for the user's user name
and password.
-l<integer> NA Specifies the log level for debug. See
"Log/Verbose Levels."
NOTE: Ensure that you run this option from
a writable folder.
-L<filename> NA Specifies the location for the debug log
file.
-p<password> NA Specifies the password used to
authenticate the command transaction. If
the
-p option is used, the -i option is not
allowed.
-u<username> NA Specifies the user name that is used to
authenticate the command transaction. If
not specified, the default user name
racadmusr is used. If the -u option is
used, the -p option must be used, and the
-i option (interactive) is not allowed.
-v<integer> NA Specifies the verbose level for screen
output. See "Log/Verbose Levels."
NA clearasrscreen Clears the last automatic server restart
(ASR) (crash) screen.
NA clrraclog Clears the RAC log.
RACADM 185
NA clrsel Clears RAC system event log (SEL).
NA config Configures the RAC. See
"config/getconfig" for more information
about the subcommand options and
arguments.
NA coredump Displays the last RAC coredump.
NA coredumpdelete Deletes the last RAC coredump.
NA fwupdate Updates the firmware on the RAC. See
"fwupdate" for more information about
the subcommand options and arguments.
NA getconfig Gets the RAC configuration data. See
"config/getconfig" for more information
about the subcommand options and
arguments.
NA getniccfg Displays the current network settings.
NA getssninfo Retrieves session information for one or
more currently active or pending sessions
from the Session Manager's session table.
See "getssninfo" for more information
about the subcommand options and
arguments.
NA getraclog Displays the RAC log. See "getraclog" for
more information about the
subcommand options and arguments.
NA getractime Displays the current RAC time.
NA getsel Displays records from the SEL.
NA getssninfo Displays the session information. See
"getssninfo" for more information about
the subcommand options and arguments.
NA getsvctag Displays the service tag information.
Table 6-1. RACADM Options (continued)
RACADM Options
and Arguments
RACADM
Subcommands
Short Description
186 RACADM
NA getsysinfo Retrieves session information for one or
more currently active or pending sessions
from the Session Manager's session table.
See "getsysinfo" for more information
about the subcommand options and
arguments.
NA gettracelog Displays the RAC diagnostic trace log.
See "gettracelog" for more information
about the subcommand options and
arguments.
NA help Lists all of the subcommands available to
use with the RACADM utility and
provides a short description for each. See
"getraclog" for more information about
the subcommand options and arguments.
NA localauthenticate Enables or disables the local operating
system authentication.
NA localConRedirDisable Performs local vKVM disable from local
system.
NA racdump Displays status and general RAC
information. See "racdump" for more
information about the subcommand
options and arguments.
NA racreset Resets the RAC. See "racreset" for more
information about the subcommand
options and arguments.
NA racresetcfg Resets all database configuration
parameters to default values; equivalent
to a soft reset. See "racresetcfg" for more
information about the subcommand
options and arguments.
Table 6-1. RACADM Options (continued)
RACADM Options
and Arguments
RACADM
Subcommands
Short Description
RACADM 187
NA setrac Sets RAC parameters from the managed
system. See "setrac" for more information
about the subcommand options and
arguments.
NA serveraction Performs system power management
operations.
NA setniccfg Modifies the network configuration
properties.
NA sslcertupload Uploads an SSL (Secure Socket Layer)
certificate to the RAC.
NA sslcertdownload Downloads an SSL certificate from the
RAC.
NA sslcertview Displays the SSL certificate information.
NA sslcsrgen Generates a certificate CSR (certificate
signing request) from the RAC.
NA sslkeyupload Uploads an SSL key to the RAC.
NA testemail Tests RAC e-mail notifications.
NA testtrap Tests RAC SNMP trap notifications.
NA version Displays the RACADM version
information.
NA vmdisconnect Disconnects virtual media connections.
NA vmkey Performs virtual media key operations.
NA usercertupload Uploads a user certificate to the DRAC.
NA usecertview Displays the user certificate information.
Table 6-1. RACADM Options (continued)
RACADM Options
and Arguments
RACADM
Subcommands
Short Description
188 RACADM
Error Messages
When using RACADM utility commands and subcommands, you may
encounter one or more of the following errors:
• Local error messages occur when problems occur with syntax,
typographical errors, incorrect names, and so on.
Example:
racadm <
subcmd
> : ERROR : <
message
>
• Transport error messages occur when the RACADM utility
communication paths to the RAC are not accessible.
Example:
racadm <
subcmd
> : Transport : ERROR : <
message
>
• RAC firmware errors occur when a fault exists in the RAC firmware
operation.
Example:
racadm <
subcmd
> : Firmware : ERROR : <
message
>
RAC Configuration Utility Options, Subcommands,
and Arguments
The following sections document all valid options, subcommands, and
arguments along with a description of the expected behavior of many option-
subcommand-argument combinations. Options, subcommands, and
arguments are case sensitive. All options, subcommands, and pre-defined
arguments are lowercase unless explicitly stated otherwise.
• racadm Command
• config/getconfig
•fwupdate
• getssninfo
• getsysinfo
• getraclog
• racdump
RACADM 189
• racreset
• racresetcfg
• setrac
NOTE: Some of the following options or arguments might not be available on all
systems.
racadm Command
Description
Without options, the RACADM utility executes the help command, which
displays a list of available tests and a one-line description of each. The
RACADM utility help <
subcommand
> displays any syntax and command
line options.
racadm Syntax
racadm <
options
> <
subcommand
> <
subcommand_options
>
racadm Options
The base racadm command has the following options and arguments:
Enabling and Disabling Remote Security
NOTE: It is recommended that you run these commands on your local system. You
must reset the RAC controller to enable these commands.
Table 6-2. racadm Command Help Option
Command Definition
racadm Command line status and configuration utility for RACs.
Table 6-3. Base racadm Command Options and Arguments
Option Description
-l <lvl> Specifies the log level for debug.
NOTE: Ensure that you run this option from a writable folder.
-v <lvl> Specifies the verbose level for screen output.
-L <file> Specifies a debug log file.
190 RACADM
Enter the following command to enable remote security:
racadm config -g cfgRacTuning -o
cfgRacTuneRemoteRacadmEnable 1
Enter the following command to disable remote security:
racadm config -g cfgRacTuning -o
cfgRacTuneRemoteRacadmEnable 0
Log/Verbose Levels
Example:
racadm -l 0x3 -L log <
subcommand
[
subcommand_options
]>
The argument 0x3 for the log level is the OR of STDOUT and STDERR
messages. Both of these message types are written to the filename log. The
verbose, or -v, option defaults to 0x3, or STDOUT, STDERR.
racadm Subcommands/Arguments
Table 6-4. Log/Verbose Levels
Option Description
0x1 Standard out messages
0x2 Standard error messages
0x4 Debug messages
Table 6-5. racadm Subcommands and Arguments
Command Description
config/getconfig Configures the RAC and displays the RAC configuration.
fwupdate Executes or gets status on RAC firmware updates.
getsysinfo Displays general RAC and system information.
getraclog Lists RAC subcommands.
getraclog
<subcommand>
Lists usage statement for the specified subcommand.
racdump Dumps RAC status and state information for debug.
racreset Resets the RAC.
RACADM 191
config/getconfig
Synopsis
racadm config [-p -c] -f <
filename
>
racadm config -g <
groupName
> -o <
objectName
> [-i
<
index
>] <
Value
>
NOTE: Option -f excludes the use of the g, o, and i options.
racadm getconfig [-p] -f <
filename
>
racadm getconfig -g <
groupName
> [-i <
index
>]
racadm getconfig -u <
username
>
racadm getconfig -h
config Subcommand Description
The configuration subcommand allows the user to set RAC configuration
parameters individually or to batch them as part of a configuration file. After
the .cfg file has been correctly parsed, each object is read. If the content is the
same, a write to the RAC does not occur. If the data is different, that RAC
object is written with the new value.
racresetcfg Resets the RAC to the default configuration.
setrac Sets time, managed system name, operating system name, and
type from the managed system to the RAC.
Table 6-6. config/getconfig Subcommands
Command Definition
config Configures the RAC.
getconfig Gets the RAC configuration data.
Table 6-5. racadm Subcommands and Arguments (continued)
Command Description
192 RACADM
Input
Output
This subcommand generates error output upon encountering either of the
following:
• Invalid syntax, group name, object name, index, or other invalid database
members
• RACADM utility transport failures
If errors are not encountered, this subcommand returns an indication of how
many configuration objects that were written out of how many total objects
were in the .cfg file.
Table 6-7. config Subcommand Options
Option Description
-f The -f <filename> option causes config to read the contents of the file
specified by <filename> and configure the RAC. The file must contain
data in the format specified in "Parsing Rules."
-p The -p, or password option, directs config to delete the password entries
contained in the config file
-f <filename> after the configuration is complete.
-g The -g <groupName>, or group option, must be used with the -o option.
The <groupName> specifies the group containing the object that is to be
set.
-o The -o <objectName> <Value>, or object option, must be used with the
-g option. This option specifies the object name that is written with the
string <Value>.
-i The -i <index>, or index option, is only valid for indexed groups and can
be used to specify a unique group. The <index> is a decimal integer from
1–16. The index is specified here by the index value, not a named value.
-c The -c, or check option, is used with the config subcommand and allows
the user to parse the .cfg file to find syntax errors. If errors are found, the
line number and a short description of what is incorrect are displayed.
Writes do not occur to the RAC. This option is a check only.
RACADM 193
getconfig Subcommand Description
The getconfig subcommand allows the user to retrieve RAC configuration
parameters on an individual basis, or all the configuration groups may be
retrieved and saved into a file.
Input
Table 6-8. getconfig Subcommand Options
Option Description
-f The -f <filename>, or filename option, causes getconfig to create the file
<filename>. It then reads all the configuration data from the RAC and
places it into the file <filename>. The created file is a format that can be
used with the racadm config -f <filename> command.
-p The -p, or password option, causes getconfig to include password
information in the file for all passwords except for the user passwords
(which are stored encrypted and cannot be decrypted).
A# cfgUserAdmPassword line is displayed as an indication that the
password is present, but password text is not displayed.
-g The -g <groupName>, or group option, can be used to display the
configuration for a single group. The groupName is the name for the group
used in the racadm.cfg files. If the group is an indexed group, use the -i
option.
-h The -h, or help option, displays a list of all available configuration groups so
the user may enter the desired group. This option is useful when you do not
remember exact group names.
-i The -i <index>, or index option, is valid only for indexed groups and can
be used to specify a unique group. The <index> is a decimal integer from 1
through 16. If -i <index> is not specified, a value of 1 is assumed for
groups, which are tables that have multiple entries. The index is specified
by the index value, not a “named” value.
-u The -u <username>, or user name option, can be used to display the
configuration for the specified user. The <username> option is the log in
user name for the user.
194 RACADM
Output
This subcommand generates error output upon encountering either of the
following:
• Invalid syntax, group name, object name, index, or other invalid database
members
• RACADM utility transport failures
If errors are not encountered, this subcommand displays the contents of the
specified configuration.
Examples
•racadm getconfig -g cfgLanNetworking
Displays all of the configuration parameters (objects) that are contained in
the group
cfgLanNetworking
.
•racadm config -g cfgLanNetworking -o
cfgNicIpAddress 10.35.10.100
Sets the
cfgNicIpAddress
configuration parameter (object) to the value
10.35.10.110. This IP address object is contained in the group
cfgLanNetworking
.
•racadm getconfig -f myrac.cfg
Reads
all
of the configuration objects, from all of the RAC group
configuration parameters and place them in a file called
myrac.cfg
.
•racadm config -f myrac.cfg
Configures or reconfigures the RAC. The
myrac.cfg
file may be created
from the command specified in the previous example if the RAC has a
desired configuration to be replicated. The
myrac.cfg
file may also be
edited manually as long as the parsing rules are followed.
NOTE: The myrac.cfg file does not contain password information. To include
this information in the file, it must be input manually. If you want to remove
password information from the myrac.cfg file, use the -p option.
•racadm getconfig -h
Displays a list of the available configuration groups on the RAC.
•racadm getconfig -u root
Displays the configuration parameters for the user named root.
RACADM 195
fwupdate
NOTE: To use this command, you must have Configure DRAC 4 permission.
Table 6-9 describes the fwupdate subcommand.
Synopsis
racadm fwupdate -u [-w] [-D]
racadm fwupdate -s
racadm fwupdate -g [-u ] [-w][-D] [-a <
IP address
>]
[-f <
path/file
>]
racadm fwupdate -c
racadm fwupdate -p -f <
update filename
> [-u] [-w] [-D]
Description
The fwupdate subcommand allows the caller to update the firmware on the
DRAC 4. The user may:
• Start updating a firmware update file that has previously been loaded into
the RAM disk update area.
• Check the status of the firmware update process.
• Instruct the DRAC 4 firmware to get the firmware update file from a
TFTP server and load it into the RAM disk area.
The user may specify the IP address and path/filename or IP address and
directory, or use the default values found in the database. The user may
also specify that the update be started after loading, or to terminate and
make a separate call to start the update process.
• Load the update file into the DRAC 4 RAM disk area.
Table 6-9. fwupdate
Subcommand Definition
fwupdate Updates the firmware on the Dell Remote
Access Controller (DRAC 4).
196 RACADM
Input
Table 6-10 describes the fwupdate subcommand options.
NOTE: The -p and -u options are not supported for the serial/telnet console.
Table 6-10. fwupdate Subcommand Options
Option Description
-u The update option performs a checksum of the firmware update file and starts
the actual update process. If this option is typed by itself, it is assumed that a
firmware update file has already been loaded into the RAM disk using the -g
or -p options. This option may also be used along with the -g or -p options.
After the firmware update file has been loaded, the update process is started
within the same call. At the end of the update, the DRAC 4 performs a soft
reset.
-w The wait option represents a delay in seconds to wait before proceeding with
the update. The -w option is only valid with the -u option.
-s The status option returns the current status of where you are in the update
process. This option is always typed by itself. Do not type the -s options with
other options. If you do, the status will display as if it was the only option
typed.
-g The get option instructs the firmware to get the firmware update file from
the TFTP server and place it in the RAM disk area. The user may also
specify the -a and/or the -f or -d options that are described next. In the
absence of the -a or -f options the defaults are read from properties
contained in the group cfgRemoteHosts, using properties
cfgRhostsFwUpdateIpAddr and cfgRhostsFwUpdatePath.
-a The IP Address option specifies the IP address of the TFTP server.
-d The -d, or directory, option specifies the directory on the TFTP server or on
the DRAC 4’s host server where the firmware update file resides. Do not use
the -f option with the -d option.
-c The -c, or checksum, option allows the user to verify an update file that has
been loaded into the RAM disk area. The update file can be loaded by one of
the two loading mechanisms (racadm CLI or TFTP). This option essentially
gets the size of the firmware update file and calculates the checksum, and
verifies the file token. The TFTP interface verifies the checksum after
loading automatically. This option is used mainly when using FTP. The -c
option is not used with other options. (The -u option will always checksum
before programming. It can be used along with the -u option).
RACADM 197
Output
Displays a message indicating which operation is being performed.
Examples
• racadm fwupdate -g - a 143.166.154.143 -f firmimg.dm1
In this example, the
-g
option tells the firmware to download the firmware
update file from a location (specified by the
-f
option) on the TFTP server
at a specific IP address (specified by the
-a
option). The update file is then
loaded into RAM disk. Since the
-u
option is not present, an update does
not
occur.
• racadm fwupdate -s
This option reads the current status of the firmware update.
-D After the update is complete, the DRAC 4 is reset. Upon boot, a call is made
to reset all firmware configuration parameters to the default values. For
more information, see "racresetcfg."
-p The -p, or put, option is used when you want to FTP the firmware update
file from the managed system to the DRAC 4. If the -f option is used, the
name of the update image must be firming.dm1. The update file is sent by
way of FTP into the DRAC 4. Checksum runs on the newly loaded image.
If the checksum is not correct, an error message is displayed. The user is not
required to use fwupdate
-s option to do this. If you type the -u option on the same command line,
the update process starts.
Table 6-10. fwupdate Subcommand Options (continued)
Option Description
198 RACADM
• racadm fwupdate -u
The
-u
option starts the update process. This command assumes that a valid
firmware update file has been previously loaded using the
-g
or
-p
option. The
update file checksum is verified for correctness before proceeding.
• racadm fwupdate -g -u -a 143.166.154.143 -f firmimg.dm1
In this example, the
-g
option tells the firmware to download the firmware
update file from a location (specified by the
-f
option) on the TFTP server
at a specific IP address (specified by the
-a
option). The update file is then
loaded into RAM disk. The
-u
option tells the firmware to proceed with
the update after the firmware is loaded.
Updating the Firmware
If you use the -f option, specify the firmimg.dm1 file.
If you are updating your firmware locally, use one of the following commands
to update your firmware:
racadm fwupdate -p -u -d <directory>
racadm fwupdate -p -u -f <filename>
Example:
racadm fwupdate -p -u -d \my\updatefiles\path
racadm fwupdate -p -u -f
\my\updatefiles\path\<
filename
>
If you are updating your firmware remotely, use the following command to
update your firmware:
racadm <
RAC_IP
> -u <
user
> -p <
password
> fwupdate -g -
u -a <
TFTP_IP
> -d <
TFTP_dir_path
>
NOTE: The -p option does not support remote firmware updates.
RACADM 199
getssninfo
Synopsis
racadm getssninfo [-A] [-u <
username
> | *]
Description
The getssninfo command returns a list of currently active or pending users
and optionally includes summary session table information. The summary
information provides the total number of sessions in each of the following
defined Session Manager states:
•Free
• Preliminary
• Unvalidated
•Valid
• Invalid
Input
Table 6-11. getssninfo Subcommand
Command Definition
getssninfo Retrieves session information for one or more currently active or
pending sessions from the Session Manager's session table.
Table 6-12. getssninfo Subcommand Options
Option Description
-A The -A option eliminates the printing of data headers.
-u The -u <username> user name option limits the printed output to only the
detail session records for the given user name. If an * symbol is given as the
user name, all users are listed. Summary information is not printed when
this option is specified.
200 RACADM
Output
None
Examples
•racadm getssninfo
Session table summary status:
1 VALID
15 AVAILABLE
•racadm getssninfo -A
1 15
"Web" "RAC\root" 192.168.1.23 "Thu, 06 Mar 2003
10:32:39 GMT-06:00" "NONE"
•racadm getssninfo -A -u *
"Web" "RAC\root" 192.168.1.23 "Thu, 06 Mar 2003
10:32:39 GMT-06:00" "NONE"
Type
---------
User
-------
IP Address
-------------
Login Date/Time
------------
Consoles
----------
Web RAC root
192.168.1.23
Thu, 06 Mar
2003 10:32:39
GMT-06:00
NONE
RACADM 201
getsysinfo
Synopsis
racadm getsysinfo [-d] [-s] [-w] [-A][-c]
Description
The getsysinfo command returns information about the RAC, system, or
watchdog status, depending on the command options. The order of data on
output is always the same: RAC information, system information, and
watchdog information.
Input
If a -d, -s, or -w option is not specified, then these three options are used as
defaults.
Output
Every data element is output as a string with the exception of the following:
• System information/operating system type
• Watchdog information/recovery action
Table 6-13. getsysinfo Subcommand
Command Definition
getsysinfo Displays RAC information, system information, and watchdog status
information.
Table 6-14. getsysinfo Subcommand Options
Option Description
-d Displays RAC information.
-s Displays system information.
-w Displays watchdog information.
-A Eliminates the printing of headers/labels.
-c Displays chassis information.
202 RACADM
Enumeration values or bitmaps are defined for these elements. When the -A
(API) option is included on the command, the enumeration/bit value of the
element is listed in the output. Otherwise, the enumeration or bit value is
mapped to a string before being output.
The following bullet items define the mapping of values to strings:
Table 6-15. Mapping of Values to Strings
Value Description
System
information/operating
system type
A bitmap defines three subfields for this value, as follows:
• IA type - Bit position 0 (least significant bit):
0 = 32 bit, 1 = 64 bit
• Major operating system - Bit positions 1–7:
000000 = Microsoft Windows 000001 = Red Hat
®
Enterprise Linux
®
,
000010 = Novell
®
NetWare
®
• Minor operating system - Bit positions 8–15:
0 = Red Hat Linux, 00000000 = Windows NT
®
,
00000001 = Windows 2000, 0 = NetWare
Watchdog recovery
action
An enumeration defines the meaning of this value:
• 0 = no-action
• 1 = hard-reset
• 2 = power-down
• 3 = power-cycle
RACADM 203
Examples
•racadm getsysinfo -A -w -s
"123456" "PowerEdge 1650" "A08" "EF23VQ-0023" ""
0x100 "Server1"
"Microsoft Windows 2000 version 5.0, Build Number
2195, Service Pack 2" "1.60"
"Watchdog Info:" 2 39 40
•racadm getsysinfo -w -s
System Information:
System ID = 123456
System Model = PowerEdge 1650
BIOS Version = A08
Asset Tag = EF23VQ-0023
Service Tag = 2MP9Z01
Hostname = Server1
OS name = Microsoft Windows 2000 version
5.0,
Build 2195 Service Pack 2
ESM Version = 1.60
Watchdog Information:
Recovery Action = Power Down
Present countdown value = 36
Initial countdown value = 40
204 RACADM
getraclog
CAUTION: The system may hang if this command is run. You may have to
powercycle the system if it hangs.
NOTE: To use this command, you must have Log In DRAC 4 permission.
Table 6-16 describes the getraclog command.
Synopsis
racadm getraclog -i
racadm getraclog [-A] [-c
count
] \[-s
start-record
]
[-v] [-V] [-m]
Description
NOTE: The command name and the racadm subcommand names may be different.
This behavior is normal.
The getraclog -i command displays the number of entries in the DRAC 4 log.
The following options allow the getraclog command to read entries:
•
-A
— Provides API-formatted output (no header).
•
-c
— Provides the maximum count of entries to be returned.
•
<blank>
— Displays the entire log; racadm and serial only (default).
•
-s
— Provides the associated number of the first displayed entry (default =
0 [list begins with the first DRAC 4 log entry]).
•
-v
— Provides
verbose
output.
•
-V
— Provides
Very verbose
output.
•
-m
— Displays 24 rows at a time, and queries for more (such as the UNIX
®
more
command).
Table 6-16. getraclog
Command Definition
getraclog -i Displays the number of entries in the DRAC 4 log.
getraclog Displays the DRAC 4 log entries.
RACADM 205
Output
One line of output is displayed for each DRAC 4 log entry.
Restrictions
The output buffer size is too big for execution across IPMI transport.
gettracelog
CAUTION: The system may hang if this command is run. You may have to
powercycle the server if it hangs.
NOTE: To use this command, you must have Log In DRAC 4 permission.
Table 6-17 describes the gettracelog command.
Synopsis
racadm gettracelog -i
racadm gettracelog -m
Description
The gettracelog -i command displays the number of entries in the DRAC 4
trace log. The gettracelog command (without the -i option) reads entries.
The -m option displays 24 rows at a time, and queries for more (such as the
UNIX more command).
Output
One line of output is displayed for each trace log entry.
Table 6-17. gettracelog
Command Definition
gettracelog -i Displays the number of entries in the DRAC 4 trace log.
gettracelog Displays the DRAC 4 trace log entries.
206 RACADM
help
Synopsis
racadm help
racadm help <
subcommand
>
Description
The help subcommand lists all of the subcommands that are available under
the racadm command along with a one-line description. You may also enter a
subcommand after help to get the syntax for a specific subcommand.
Input
None
Output
racadm help displays a complete list of subcommands.
racadm help <subcommand> displays usage information for the specified
subcommand only.
racdump
Synopsis
racadm racdump
Table 6-18. help Subcommand
Command Definition
help Lists all of the subcommands available to use with the RACADM
utility and provides a short description for each.
Table 6-19. racdump Subcommand
Command Definition
racdump Displays status and general RAC information.
RACADM 207
Description
The racdump subcommand provides a single command to get a dump, status,
and general RAC board information with a single command.
The following commands are executed as a result of the single racdump
subcommand:
• getsysinfo
• coredump
• memmap
•netstat
• getssninfo
• getsensors
Input
None
Output
The output of the individual commands are displayed.
racreset
Synopsis
racadm racreset [hard | soft | graceful] [
delay
]
Description
The racreset subcommand issues a reset to the RAC. The user is allowed to
select how many seconds of delay occur before the reset sequence is started.
The reset event is written into the RAC log.
Table 6-20. racreset Subcommand
Command Definition
racreset Resets the RAC.
208 RACADM
The default option is soft. If you do not enter an option, the RACADM utility
waits three seconds and then runs the soft option with the racreset
subcommand.
NOTE: A reboot is not necessary to apply configuration settings to the RAC. When
the configuration settings affect other system components, on the other hand, a
reboot is necessary for the affected components to detect the changes. For
example, if remote floppy boot is enabled by the RACADM utility, the remote floppy
image will not be accessible by the system until the next reboot.
Input
CAUTION: You must reboot your system after performing a hard reset of the RAC
as described in the following table.
Output
None
Table 6-21. racreset Subcommand Options
Option Description
hard A hard reset resets the entire RAC and is as close to a power-on reset as
can be achieved using software. The RAC log, database, and selected
daemons are shutdown gracefully prior to the reset. A hard reset should
be considered as a final effort. PCI configuration is lost.
soft A soft reset is a microprocessor and microprocessor subsystem reset that
resets the processor core to restart the software. PCI configurations are
preserved. The RAC log, database, and selected daemons are shutdown
gracefully prior to the reset.
graceful A graceful reset is the same as a soft reset.
<delay>The user is allowed to select how many seconds of delay occur before the
reset sequence is started. A valid delay entry is between 1–60 seconds.
The default is 3 seconds.
RACADM 209
Examples
•racadcm racreset soft 1
Start the RAC soft reset sequence in 1 second.
•racadm racreset soft 20
Start the RAC soft reset sequence after 20 seconds.
racresetcfg
Synopsis
racadm racresetcfg
Description
The racresetcfg command removes all database property entries that have
been configured by the user. The database has default properties for all
entries that are used to restore the card back to its original default settings.
After resetting the database properties, the RAC resets automatically.
CAUTION: Before using this command, ensure that you want to restore your
database to its original default state with default user root and default
password calvin.
NOTE: After issuing a racresetcfg subcommand, stop and then restart the
following services: Server Agent, Server Agent Event Monitor, and SNMP. See the
Dell OpenManage Server Administrator’s User’s Guide for information on stopping
and restarting the services in your operating system.
Input
None
Output
None
Table 6-22. racresetcfg Subcommand
Command Definition
racadm
racresetcfg
Resets all database configuration parameters to default values;
equivalent to a soft reset.
210 RACADM
setrac
Synopsis
racadm setrac [-h -o -T -d]
Description
This command sets time, managed system name, operating system name, or
operating system type from the managed system to the RAC. If no options are
entered, all four parameters are set. The -d option allows the user to display
the parameters only without actually writing them to the RAC firmware.
Any combination of options, or no options, may be entered.
Input
Table 6-23. setrac Subcommand
Command Definition
setrac Sets RAC parameters from the managed system.
Table 6-24. setrac Subcommand Options
Option Description
-h Gets the Hostname from the managed system and writes it to the RAC.
This parameter is available for viewing using the getsysinfo command, and
under the object ID interface using config/getconfig as
[ifcRacManagedNodeOs] ifcRacMnOsHostname.
-o Gets the OS Name from the managed system and writes it to the RAC.
This parameter is available for viewing under the object ID interface using
config/getconfig as [ifcRacManagedNodeOs] ifcRacMnOsName.
-T Gets the OS Type from the managed system and writes it to the RAC.
This parameter is available for viewing using the getsysinfo command and
under the object ID interface using config/getconfig as
[ifcRacManagedNodeOs] ifcRacMnOsOsType.
-d The -d, or display option, allows the user to get the UTC time,
Hostname, OS Name, and OS Type from the managed system and
display these items only. Parameters are not written to the RAC. If the
-d option is entered along with other options, then those parameters are
displayed only.
RACADM 211
Output
A message is displayed indicating the values obtained from the managed
system, and if they are being written to the RAC or only displayed.
Examples
•racadm setrac -d
Only the parameter values are displayed.
•racadm setrac -h
The UTC time and managed system name are taken from the managed
system and written to the RAC.
DRAC Property Database Group and Object
Definitions
The Dell Remote Access Controller (DRAC) III, DRAC 4, DRAC 5, iDRAC,
and iDRAC6 property database contain the configuration information for the
DRAC III, DRAC 4, DRAC 5, iDRAC, and iDRAC6 controllers respectively.
For the property database group and object definitions of DRAC and iDRAC,
see the following guides on the Dell Support site at support.dell.com:
• Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller User Guide
• Dell Remote Access Controller 5 User's Guide
•
Dell Remote Access Controller 4 User's Guide
• Dell Remote Access Card III User's Guide
212 RACADM
Messages and Codes 213
Messages and Codes
This section documents the error messages and codes used in Dell™
OpenManage™ Deployment Toolkit (DTK).
SYSCFG Error Codes and Messages
The SYSCFG utility checks your commands for correct syntax and valid
input. When you enter a command, a message is displayed stating the results
of the command.
Failure Messages
The SYSCFG utility failure messages provide error codes to help diagnose
why some commands do not succeed.
Table A-1 lists SYSCFG error codes and messages.
Table A-1. SYSCFG Error Codes and Messages
Error
Code
Message
0 Success
1 Attempt to read write-only parameter.
2 Password cannot exceed 16 characters.
3 A BMC was either not detected or is not supported.
4 This username is already in use. Enter a unique
username.
5 Access mode not supported.
6 Cannot return number of requested data bytes.
7 User ID 1 cannot be assigned a username.
8 Cannot execute duplicated request.
9 There was an error clearing the SEL.
214 Messages and Codes
10 Clear SEL cannot be accompanied with any other
option.
11 racreset cannot be accompanied with any other
option.
12 Cannot execute command. Command, or request
parameter(s), not supported in present state.
13 Command not supported on given channel.
14 The community string may only contain printable
ASCII characters.
15 Destination unavailable. Cannot deliver request to
selected destination.
16 Cannot execute command. Insufficient privilege
level.
17 Command illegal for specified sensor or record
type.
18 Invalid commstring value.
19 Hardware subsystem error. Invalid data field in
request.
20 Invalid destination IP address.
21 The GUID is invalid.
22 Invalid gateway.
23 Invalid hostname.
24 Invalid IP address.
25 Invalid DNS IP address.
26 Invalid sub net mask.
27 Invalid value for PEF. PEF value should be between
1 and 16.
28 Reservation Canceled or Invalid Reservation ID.
29 Invalid Time to live value.
Table A-1. SYSCFG Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Error
Code
Message
Messages and Codes 215
30 Invalid VLANID value.
31 Invalid Command. Used to indicate an unrecognized
or unsupported command.
32 Command invalid for given LUN.
33 Load defaults cannot be accompanied with any other
option.
34 There was an error loading the defaults.
35 Node Busy. Command could not be processed because
command processing resources are temporarily
unavailable.
36 Out of space. Command could not be completed
because of a lack of storage space required to
execute the given command operation.
37 This parameter is not supported.
38 Parameter out of range. One or more parameters in
the data field of the Request are out of range.
39 The password may only contain printable ASCII
characters.
40 Password test failed.
41 Request data length invalid.
42 Request data field length limit exceeded.
43 Requested Sensor, data, or record not present.
44 Request data truncated.
45 Command response could not be provided.
46 Command response could not be provided. BMC
initialization or initialization agent in
progress.
47 Command response could not be provided. Device in
firmware update mode.
Table A-1. SYSCFG Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Error
Code
Message
216 Messages and Codes
48 Command response could not be provided. SDR
Repository in update mode.
49 Cannot execute command, SEL erase in progress.
50 Attempt to set the 'set in progress' value when
not in the 'set in complete' state.
51 The SOL character accumulate interval is invalid.
52 The SOL character send threshold is invalid.
53 The SOL retry interval is invalid.
54 Command completed successfully.
55 Time-out while processing command. Response
unavailable.
56 Unspecified error.
57 The password may only contain printable ASCII
characters.
58 Username cannot exceed 16 characters.
59 Invalid VLANID value. Enter in dddd format.
60 Attempt to write read-only parameter.
61 BMC is busy.
62 Response data did not return successfully.
63 BMC time out error.
64 Option '%s' requires an argument.
65 The asset tag for this system is not available.
66 The asset tag cannot be more than 10 characters
long.
67 The required BIOS interfaces cannot be found on
this system.
68 The BIOS version information is not available.
Table A-1. SYSCFG Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Error
Code
Message
Messages and Codes 217
69 There is not enough free system memory to complete
the BIOS update.
70 The BIOS update file version is a different
version class (A00, X00) than the current system
BIOS. Use the --force option to use this BIOS
image.
71 The BIOS update file version is older than the
current system bios. Use the --force option to use
this BIOS image.
72 The BIOS update file version is identical to the
current system bios. Use the --force option to use
this BIOS image.
73 The sequence list must be a comma-separated
numerical list of valid unique boot device numbers
(ex: 2, 1, 3).
74 The sequence list must be a comma-separated list
of valid unique device names (ex: nic.emb.1,
hdd.emb.1) or a comma-separated numerical list of
valid unique boot device numbers (ex: 2, 1, 3).
75 There was an error setting the sequence.
76 The list is not formatted correctly. See the help
for more details.
77 The size of returned buffer is larger than the
size of allocated buffer.
78 There was a problem getting the state byte.
79 The state byte is not available on this system.
80 There was a problem setting the state byte.
81 The state byte must be a value between 0 and 255
decimal.
82 The CPU information is not available.
Table A-1. SYSCFG Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Error
Code
Message
218 Messages and Codes
83 The dependent option '%s' required for this
subcommand is missing in the command line.
84 Duplicate sub command '%s' has been entered.
85 The script file does contain not a valid DTK
environment script signature.
86 The format of the environment variable is
incorrect.
87 The --envar option can only be used for a single
option.
88 The --envar option can only be used for report
operations.
89 The individual sub commands should be specified
for the -s option.
90 Getting external serial connector settings failed.
91 Setting external serial connector settings failed.
92 There was an error opening the file.
93 File does not have write permission.
94 The file contains invalid options.
95 The replication information does not match for
this system.
96 There can only be one section in the input file.
97 Bad ini file, the section cannot be found.
98 The format of the bios image file is incorrect.
99 Report operations and set operations must be
separate.
100 Help is not available for the option.
101 The -x (--hex) option can only be used with -b or
-r.
102 Input file '%s' not found.
Table A-1. SYSCFG Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Error
Code
Message
Messages and Codes 219
103 Input file '%s' cannot be read.
104 Invalid argument for option '%s'.
105 Function table lookup error.
106 The machine ID was not found in the file '%s'.
107 The system memory information is not available.
108 Mode can only be used with the --pci option.
109 The device name or index must be present in the
boot order.
110 The output file '%s' could not be opened. Please
make sure the path exists and the media is not
write protected.
111 Could not write to output file, disk may be full.
112 The current password must be supplied with a new
password using --oldsyspwd.
113 The current password must be supplied with a new
password using --oldsetuppwd.
114 The current password can only be supplied when
setting a new password.
115 Actions are not allowed for this filter. Only
alerts are allowed.
116 There was an error getting the option '%s'.
117 The option '%s' is not available or cannot be
configured through software.
118 There was an error setting the option '%s'.
119 The -n (--namefile) option can only be used with -
-pci.
120 The password may only contain alphanumeric
characters.
121 The BIOS passwords have been disabled via jumper.
Table A-1. SYSCFG Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Error
Code
Message
220 Messages and Codes
122 The password length must be between 1 and 32.
123 This password is locked and can only be unlocked
by the admin user.
124 There was an error setting the password.
125 The LCD string length must be between 1 and %s.
126 The LCD string may only contain alphanumeric
characters.
127 There was an error setting the LCD string.
128 The second channel can only be set if the RAID
controller is set to RAID.
129 The set operation '%s' requires sub commands.
130 The service tag for this system is not available.
131 The system ID value is not available.
132 The system information string is not available.
133 A system error has occurred.
134 Usage error.
135 The uuid information is not present on this system
136 Version cannot be accompanied with any other
option.
137 The self-identify blinker timer should be set to
0..255 second(s).
138 Encrypt key is too long.
139 Encrypt key is invalid, accepted characters are 0
to 9 or A to F.
140 Parameter has been temporarily disabled due to a
dependency on other settings.
141 The old password supplied is incorrect. The new
password will not be set. Please try again.
Table A-1. SYSCFG Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Error
Code
Message
Messages and Codes 221
142 Cannot stat /etc/omreg.cfg file. Please ensure
/etc/omreg.cfg file is present and is valid for
your environment. You can copy this file from the
DTK iso.
143 Getting nicselection settings failed.
144 HAPI Driver Load Error.
145 Filter action power reduction is only supported
for the system power warn/fail filters.
146 TPM Clear settings requires setup password.
147 There is currently no TPM Clear request pending.
148 Password is not required for retrieving the ’%s’
options.
149 Setup password is required for setting the ’%s’
options.
150 Invalid Password override.
151 Invalid TPM set option.
152 There was an error setting the TPM option.
153 There is no setup password installed on this
system.
154 The setup password supplied is incorrect. Please
try again.
155 Profile should be custom for setting cpupowermode,
memorypowermode and fanmode.
156 There was an error setting the Power Option.
157 The power cap value entered is out of range.
Please try again.
158 The power cap value entered must be between 0 to
100 if unit is percent.
159 Invalid IPv6 address. The IPv6 address cannot be
link-local or multicast.
Table A-1. SYSCFG Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Error
Code
Message
222 Messages and Codes
160 Invalid IPv6 address. The IPv6 address specified
has incorrect address format.
161 Invalid IPv6 address. The gateway address
specified has incorrect address format.
162 Invalid IPv6 address. The Primary DNS server
address specified has incorrect address format.
163 Invalid IPv6 address. The Secondary DNS server
address specified has incorrect address format.
164 Invalid IPv6 address. The gateway address
specified is invalid.
165 Invalid configuration. Attempting to apply IPv6
configuration on a non supported platform.
166 Invalid IPv6 configuration. Attempt to set DNS
server address manually while DNS address source
is set to auto.
167 Invalid IPv6 configuration. Attempt to set IPv6
address manually while IPv6 address source is set
to auto.
168 Invalid IPv6 configuration. Attempting to apply
IPv6 configuration without loading IPv6 stack.
169 Invalid IPv4 configuration. Attempting to apply
IPv4 configuration with IPv4 disabled.
170 Invalid IPv6 configuration. Ipv6 address cannot be
specified without specifying prefix-length.
171 Invalid IPv6 configuration. dnssrcv6 cannot be set
to auto when ipsrcv6 is set to manual.
172 Error while executing IPMI Set command.
173 Error while executing IPMI Get command.
174 Error during Trap Alert.
175 Unspecified error.
Table A-1. SYSCFG Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Error
Code
Message
Messages and Codes 223
UPINIT Common Error Codes and Messages
The UPINIT utility checks your commands for correct syntax. When you
enter a command, a message is displayed stating the results of the command.
Failure Messages
The UPINIT utility failure messages provide error codes to help diagnose why
some commands do not succeed.
Table A-2 lists error codes and messages common to Linux and
Microsoft®Windows® PE environments.
176 Getting LCD settings failed.
177 Invalid configuration. Attempting to set cap when
capenable is set to disable.
178 Invalid configuration. Attempting to set cap when
hardware does not support setting.
179 Invalid Configuration Option.
180 Cannot execute command. Parameter is illegal
because command sub-function has been disabled or
is unavailable.
Table A-2. UPINIT Common Error Codes and Messages
Error
Code
Message
0 Dell Utility Partition created successfully.
1 Error: Disk ID not specified.
2 Error: SIZE not specified.
3 Error: Utility Partition Image file not specified.
4 Error: DRMK Path not specified.
Table A-1. SYSCFG Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Error
Code
Message
224 Messages and Codes
UPINIT Linux-Specific Error Codes and Messages
Table A-3 lists error codes and messages specific to the Linux environment.
5 Error: Dell Utility Partition already exits. Please use --overwrite option to
upgrade or overwrite.
6 Error: Partitions exists. Please clear all the partitions before running
upinit.sh.
7 Error: DOS file(s) not found at the specified path.
8 Error: UP IMAGE not found at the specified location.
9 Error: format failed.
10 Error: Invalid size. Size should be a number between 32 and 2000.
11 Error: sysdrmk failed.
12 System Error.
13 Error: Invalid Argument: <argument>.
14 Error: Unzip failed.
Table A-3. UPINIT Linux-Specific Error Codes and Messages
Error Code Message
31 Error: Invalid disk specified.
32 Error: Mount failed.
33 Cannot create mount point <mount point>. File exists.
34 Error: fdisk failed.
Table A-2. UPINIT Common Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Error
Code
Message
Messages and Codes 225
UPINIT Windows PE-Specific Error Codes and
Messages
Table A-4 lists error codes and messages specific to the Windows PE
environment.
RAIDCFG Error Codes and Messages
The RAIDCFG utility checks your commands for correct syntax when you
enter them. When you enter a command, a message displays stating the
results of the command.
Failure Messages
The RAIDCFG utility failure messages provide error codes to help diagnose
why some commands do not succeed. See Table A-5 for a list of the error
codes and the associated messages.
Table A-5 lists RAIDCFG error codes and messages.
Table A-4. UPINIT Windows PE-Specific Error Codes and Messages
Error Code Message
31 Error: DISKPART failed.
32 Error: DISKPART command file not found.
Table A-5. RAIDCFG Error Codes and Messages
Error Code Message
0 RAIDCFG Command successful!
1 Error! Incorrect Syntax.
2 Failure!
3 Illegal operation
4 Unsupported operation
5 Device not found.
6 Format boot drive illegal
226 Messages and Codes
7 Buffer too small.
8 Virtual Disk contains boot partition. Use
force option to delete.
9 Init boot drive failed.
10 Format boot drive failed.
11 Cannot write boot drive.
12 Unsupported RAID value.
13 Invalid RAID configuration.
14 Span depth not in range.
15 RAID 1 failed.
16 Exactly 2 array disks are required to create
a RAID 1 virtual disk.
17 Unsupported stripe size value.
18 RAID 5 only.
19 RAID 5 error.
20 A minimum of 3 array disks are required to
create a RAID 5 virtual disk.
21 RAID 0 failed.
22 RAID 10 failed.
23 RAID 50 failed.
24 RAID 5 not supported.
25 RAID 50 not supported.
26 Size too small for given RAID type.
27 Wrong number of disks for RAID 1-
concatenated.
28 Insufficient space to mirror disks.
Table A-5. RAIDCFG Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Error Code Message
Messages and Codes 227
29 Create Mirror not supported.
30 Disk in use.
31 Disk Lock operation failed.
32 Disk locked.
33 Disk Unlock operation failed.
34 Disk Unlocked.
35 Disk failed on rebuild.
36 Hot Spare not free.
37 Disk Diagnostic failed.
38 Disk Rebuild failed.
39 Disk Format failed.
40 Cancel of Disk Diagnostic failed.
41 Cancel of Disk Rebuild failed.
42 Cancel of Disk Format failed
43 Assign Hot Spare failed
44 Disk too Small for Hot Spare.
45 Unassign Hot Spare failed.
46 Prepare Disk for Removal failed.
47 Disk Online failed.
48 Disk Offline failed.
49 UnMount Operation failed.
50 Mount Operation failed.
51 Cannot Format Array Disk.
52 Bad chunk size.
53 Invalid disk.
Table A-5. RAIDCFG Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Error Code Message
228 Messages and Codes
54 Virtual disk not found.
55 Virtual disk locked.
56 Drive in use.
57 Reached maximum physical size.
58 Reached maximum count of virtual disks.
59 There is not enough free space on the array
disk(s) to allow the operation to complete;
the size of the virtual disk is too large;
or communication to the array disk(s) has
been lost.
60 Limit your array disk selection to those
disks already included in another single
virtual disk or to those array disks that
are not used at all by another virtual disk.
61 Invalid Parameter
62 Failed drive cannot be added.
63 The controller cannot support the number of
array disks that you have selected. Choose a
smaller number.
64 Delete virtual disk failed. Controller busy.
65 Delete virtual disk failed.
66 Create virtual disk failed.
67 Create virtual disk failed. Controller busy.
68 Create virtual disk failed. Failed to map
virtual disk to operating system disk.
69 Create virtual disk failed. Failed to map
virtual disk to operating system disk.
70 Virtual disk initialization failed.
Table A-5. RAIDCFG Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Error Code Message
Messages and Codes 229
71 Virtual disk initialization failed.
Controller busy.
72 Virtual disk reconstruction failed.
Controller busy.
73 Virtual disk resynching failed. Controller
busy.
74 Flush Virtual disk's cache failed on
controller.
75 Virtual disk partition specified not found.
76 Unsupported cache policy value.
77 Unsupported write policy value.
78 Unsupported read policy value.
79 Cancel initialization on virtual disk
failed.
80 Cancel reconstruction on virtual disk
failed.
81 Cancel resynchronization on virtual disk
failed.
82 The maximum number of virtual disks that can
be created has been reached.
83 The new virtual disk must use only the
remaining free space on the array disks used
in the last virtual disk you created. Select
all array disks that are used in the last
virtual disk you created.
84 You have selected an array disk that is in a
degraded or failed state. Choose another
array disk.
85 Delete the last created virtual disk first.
Table A-5. RAIDCFG Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Error Code Message
230 Messages and Codes
86 Virtual disk initialized for use and no
override requested.
87 Virtual disk type requested is invalid for
the attempted operation.
88 Virtual disk Move operation failed. Cannot
rename, virtual disk is already in use.
89 Failover invalid.
90 Virtual disk resynching.
91 Virtual disk resynch failed.
92 Virtual disk reconstruct failed.
93 Cannot format a virtual disk that contains a
boot or system partition.
94 Cannot initialize a virtual disk that
contains a boot or system partition.
95 Virtual disk Copy failed.
96 Virtual disk mirror set required.
97 Virtual disk Create - Read-only failed.
98 Virtual disk Create - Read-write failed.
99 Virtual disk - Clear-to-zero failed.
100 Virtual Disk Requires Non Multilevel.
101 Virtual Disk Promote Operation failed.
102 Specified virtual disk has no drive letter
assigned to it.
103 Cannot expose virtual disk.
104 Cannot reconfigure virtual disk.
105 Cannot stop the reconfiguration of the
virtual disk.
Table A-5. RAIDCFG Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Error Code Message
Messages and Codes 231
106 SMART report count not supported.
107 Operations on hidden virtual disks are not
allowed.
108 Virtual disk is in use.
109 The virtual disk is in use. It cannot be
reconfigured at this time.
110 Virtual disk operation is temporarily
unavailable. Initialization in progress.
111 Virtual disk operation is temporarily
unavailable. Reconstruction in progress.
112 Virtual disk operation is temporarily
unavailable. Rebuild in progress.
113 Virtual disk operation is temporarily
unavailable. Check consistency in progress.
114 Specified virtual disk too small.
115 Virtual disk operation not supported. Size
too small.
116 Operation is temporarily unavailable. Space
in use.
117 Cannot reconfigure to the given RAID level.
118 Cannot reconfigure from current RAID level
to the given RAID level.
119 One of the array disks selected for the
virtual disk is already in use.
120 Virtual disk operation not supported. Cannot
use non-RAID disk.
121 Controller Read Configuration failed.
122 Controller Write Configuration failed.
Table A-5. RAIDCFG Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Error Code Message
232 Messages and Codes
123 Controller cache flush failed.
124 Enable alarm on controller failed.
125 Disable alarm on controller failed.
126 Quiet alarm on controller failed.
127 Controller failed to perform the task.
128 Specified bus not found for controller.
129 Call to set cache mode on the controller
failed.
130 Unexpected controller error.
131 Controller out of memory.
132 Invalid controller state.
133 Controller failed.
134 Controller busy.
135 Controller does not exist.
136 Controller name is invalid.
137 Controller is iterated.
138 Rename of virtual disk was not successful.
139 The controller was not able to erase the
file system from the specified virtual disk.
140 The controller was not able to add space to
the specified concatenation set.
141 The controller was not able to get the
status of the specified mirror set.
142 The controller was not able to set the
requested failover space.
143 The controller cannot get the failover space
information.
Table A-5. RAIDCFG Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Error Code Message
Messages and Codes 233
144 Controller cannot unmirror the specified
virtual disk.
145 The controller could not split the specified
virtual disk.
146 The controller could not lock the specified
virtual disk.
147 Controller IO paused.
148 No controller parameter support.
149 Controller does not recognize parameter
symbol.
150 Controller Battery Recondition failed.
151 Controller Get disk signature failed.
152 Controller Read Flags failed.
153 Controller Set Flags failed.
154 Controller Remove Snap Shot failed.
155 Controller not supported.
156 Controller device initialization failure.
157 Partner controller already opened read-
write.
158 No partner controller found.
159 The virtual disk is not valid for requested
operation.
160 Cannot communicate with controller.
161 Set operation failed.
162 Operation to update error count of SMART
device has failed.
163 Operation to clear error count of SMART
device has failed.
Table A-5. RAIDCFG Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Error Code Message
234 Messages and Codes
164 Driver could not execute.
165 Cannot delete virtual disk.
166 Cannot set temperature probe. Invalid value
entered.
167 Cannot set enclosure tag. Invalid value
entered.
168 Cannot set enclosure alarm.
169 Temperature probe value out of range.
170 Cannot set cache mode.
172 Data will be lost on the secondary disk and
a reboot will be forced.
173 Cluster Services (MSCS) is running. Deleting
a virtual disk that contains a cluster
resource can result in unpredictable errors
or system hangs (quorum disk). You should
shut down cluster services before deleting
cluster resources. Are you sure you want to
proceed?
174 Cannot perform Create Virtual Disk or Delete
Virtual Disk while the other server in a
cluster is online. Please shut one of the
servers down and retry the operation.
176 Invalid array disks or failover drives
selected for reconfigure/create operation.
Please make sure that all array disks and
failover drives associated with the virtual
disk are selected.
Table A-5. RAIDCFG Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Error Code Message
Messages and Codes 235
177 The maximum number of partitions have
already been created on one of the selected
array disk(s). Each array disk can hold
portions (partitions) of up to 10 virtual
disks. This virtual disk cannot be created
because one or more array disk(s) have
reached the partition limit.
178 The virtual disk is in use. Please close any
applications that use the virtual disk and
unmount any file systems that reside on the
virtual disk.
179 The firmware version is not supported.
Please update the firmware from
http://support.dell.com.
180 The specified device does not have enough
free space to be used as failover space for
the specified virtual disk.
181 The operation failed. Please rescan the
controller and retry the operation.
182 The operation cannot be performed while a
task is running on the specified virtual
disk.
183 The specified virtual disk has no dead disk
segments.
184 The operation cannot be performed at this
time. The firmware can recondition a battery
that has a Degraded or Power Low state. The
firmware will not recondition a battery that
is functioning normally or that has a Ready,
Failed or Missing state.
Table A-5. RAIDCFG Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Error Code Message
236 Messages and Codes
185 The version of the controller firmware
installed on your system does not support
this operation.
186 There are no disks of the correct type
available to be assigned as a hot spare.
187 There are no disks of sufficient size
available to be assigned as a hot spare.
188 There are no disks of the correct type and
sufficient size available to be assigned as
a hot spare.
189 The Create Virtual Disk task was successful
but the operating system may not be aware of
the new virtual disk.
191 The import of foreign configurations is
complete. Some configurations could not be
imported.
192 Enable alarm command failed. The enclosure
processor is busy or a firmware download is
in progress.
193 Disable alarm command failed. The enclosure
processor is busy or a firmware download is
in progress.
194 Quiet alarm command failed. The enclosure
processor is busy or a firmware download is
in progress.
195 An error occurred while resetting a
temperature probe.
200 No array disks found!
201 Invalid Virtual Disk ID!
Table A-5. RAIDCFG Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Error Code Message
Messages and Codes 237
202 RAID Type & Size are required to create a
virtual disk. Ensure that the RAID type and
the size are correct.
203 Invalid Environment command!
204 File is not writable!
205 Setting Environment Variable Command failed!
206 Filename is not provided!
207 Invalid Strict option! Please provide a
valid number between 1 and 100.
208 Span depth is not needed for this RAID type.
209 Array disk(s) cannot be part of virtual
disk(s) and also be hotspares.
210 Cannot have silent and logfile switch with
the same command.
211 Invalid array disk(s)!
212 Invalid failover disk(s)!
213 Creation of a virtual disk on this RAID
controller requires the use of the entire
disk space of the array disks. The size or -
sz parameter is not needed.
214 Invalid size given! size=max or -sz=max is
not supported for this RAID controller.
215 The value given for envname or -envn is null
or too long.
216 Invalid virtual disk size!
217 The strict option provided failed! Virtual
disk is not created.
Table A-5. RAIDCFG Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Error Code Message
238 Messages and Codes
218 Unable to determine optimum size for Virtual
disk. Ensure that the array disks are of the
same protocol (i.e. SAS, SATA, SCSI). If
there is a mismatch of the array disks then
the RAIDCFG will not be able to determine
the optimum size. In addition, also ensure
that there is drive size available for the
specified virtual disk.
219 One or more array disks selected to create
virtual disk or hotspare doesn't have enough
disk space. Please make sure that all the
array disks and failover drives selected
have enough free space.
220 The number of array disks provided is
incorrect for the requested RAID Type! RAID
1 requires exactly 2 array disks, RAID 5
requires at least 3 array disks, RAID 10
requires at least 4 array disks and RAID 50
requires at least 6 array disks.
221 Input file cannot be read.
222 Input file not found.
223 Error in opening the file.
Table A-5. RAIDCFG Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Error Code Message
Messages and Codes 239
RACADM Firmware Error Codes and Messages
Table A-6 lists RACADM firmware error codes and messages.
Table A-6. RACADM Firmware Error Codes and Messages
Error Code Message
1 UNKNOWN COMMAND.
2 OUTPUT ERROR
3 TOO FEW ARGUMENTS
4 UNKNOWN PARAMETER
5 CAN'T LOCK RESOURCE
6 RESOURCE LOCKED
7 USER NOT IN DATABASE
8 WRONG PASSWORD
9 LOGIN INCORRECT
10 NOT ACCESSIBLE VIA TELNET CONNECTION
11 ACCESS DENIED
12 INVALID ARGUMENT
13 INVALID GROUP NAME
14 USER DATABASE FULL
15 CAN'T CHANGE FACTORY DEFAULT
16 USER ALREADY IN DATABASE
17 CLOSING TELNET CONNECTION
18 USER DATABASE NOT INITIALIZED
19 INVALID COMMAND SHELL CALL
20 INVALID INPUT FILE
21 TFTP ERROR
22 PCI ERROR
240 Messages and Codes
23 SERVER IS IN GRAPHICS MODE
24 SYSTEM DATE AND TIME NOT SET
25 OUT OF MEMORY
26 ACCESS LOCKED
27 PAGING ERROR
28 PAGING ALREADY IN PROGRESS
29 ERROR ACCESSING DEVICE
30 WRONG NUMBER OF ARGUMENTS
31 NO SCREEN FOR ASR STORED
32 CAN'T ADD HISTORY MONITOR
33 INVALID IDENTIFIER
34 CANNOT WRITE TO FLASH
35 FIRMWARE FILE INVALID
36 CANNOT READ REGISTER
37 CANNOT UNLOCK RESOURCE
38 TIME OUT
39 SERVER IN TEXT MODE
40 WRONG GRAPHICS MODE
41 CONFIG SPACE LOCKED
42 MASTER LOCKED
43 ASB BUS LOCKED
44 HISTORY MONITORS NOT YET AVAILABLE
45 NO VALID VALUE FOR THIS FIELD
46 DIAGNOSTIC TASK ERROR
47 DIAGNOSTIC TASK IS ALREADY RUNNING
Table A-6. RACADM Firmware Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Error Code Message
Messages and Codes 241
RACADM Utility Error Codes and Messages
Table A-7 lists RACADM utility error codes and messages.
48 NO DIAGNOSTIC TASK RUNNING
49 READ ONLY
50 SNARFING IS NOT AVAILABLE
51 TEXT RESOLUTION OF SERVER CHANGED
52 MODULE NOT LOADED
53 IPMI ERROR
54 ERROR IN DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
Table A-7. RACADM Error Codes and Messages
Error Code Message
513 An unknown failure occurred.
514 Librac library not initialized.
515 An invalid parameter was passed into
function.
516 Invalid DRSTYPE specified.
517 Librac library already initialized.
518 Invalid transport type specified.
519 Invalid library user.
520 A connection to the RAC controller could
not be established.
521 Failed to perform read operation with RAC
controller.
522 Failed to perform write operation with RAC
controller.
Table A-6. RACADM Firmware Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Error Code Message
242 Messages and Codes
523 Invalid message ID.
524 Invalid message type.
525 Invalid response message.
526 Specified user buffer is too small to hold
data.
527 Authentication failed - Invalid user name
or password.
528 Invalid CHAP protocol response encountered.
529 CHAP buffer too small.
530 Timeout occurred.
531 Insufficient user privileges to perform
operation.
532 TFTP write error encountered.
533 TFTP read error encountered.
534 TFTP local file write error encountered.
535 TFTP local file read error encountered.
536 TFTP write request failed.
537 TFTP read request failed.
538 Failed to open file.
539 Failed to load socket library.
540 Invalid socket library.
541 Unable to resolve HostName.
542 Failed to create socket.
543 Socket read operation failed.
544 Socket write operation failed.
545 Failed to create SSL context object.
Table A-7. RACADM Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Error Code Message
Messages and Codes 243
546 Failed to create SSL BIO object.
547 Unable to create SSL socket connection.
548 Failed to initialize socket.
549 Failed to login to RAC successfully.
550 Invalid session ID specified.
551 Failed to logout from RAC successfully.
552 Command execution failed.
553 FTP Get operation failed.
554 FTP Put operation failed.
555 Failed to initialize FTP interface.
556 Failed to load SSL library.
557 Failed to initialize librac library.
558 Invalid session ID.
559 SpcmpObjectName failed.
560 SpcmpObjectIdGet failed.
561 SpcmpObjectIdSet failed.
562 Failed to send SPCMP message to RAC.
563 Invalid transport session info.
Table A-7. RACADM Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Error Code Message
244 Messages and Codes
564 LAN Proxy error - please make sure your
proxy settings are configured correctly.
565 RAC service not currently installed.
566 RAC service is not started.
567 RAC service is starting.
568 RAC controller not present.
569 RAC controller is currently resetting.
Table A-7. RACADM Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Error Code Message
BMC Platform Events Filter Alert Messages 245
BMC Platform Events Filter Alert
Messages
All possible Platform Event Filter (PEF) Alert Messages along with a
description of each event are listed in Table B-1.
Table B-1. BMC PEF Alert Events
Event Description
Fan Probe Failure The fan is running too slow or not at all.
Voltage Probe Failure The voltage is too low for proper operation.
Discrete Voltage Probe
Failure
The voltage is too low for proper operation.
Temperature Probe Warning The temperature is approaching excessively high or
low limits.
Temperature Probe Failure The temperature is either too high or too low for
proper operation.
Chassis Intrusion Detected The system chassis has been opened.
Redundancy (PS or Fan)
Degraded
Redundancy for the fans and/or power supplies has
been reduced.
Redundancy (PS or Fan)
Lost
No redundancy remains for the system's fans and/or
power supplies.
Processor Warning A processor is running at less than peak performance
or speed.
Processor Failure A processor has failed.
PPS/VRM/DCtoDC
Warning
The power supply, voltage regulator module, or
DC-to-DC converter is pending a failure condition.
Power Supply/VRM/D2D
Failure
The power supply, voltage regulator module, or
DC-to-DC converter has failed.
Hardware log is full or
emptied
Either an empty or a full hardware log requires
administrator attention.
246 BMC Platform Events Filter Alert Messages
Automatic System Recovery The system is hung or is not responding and is
taking an action configured by Automatic System
Recovery.
System Power Probe
Warning
The system is setting actions when a power
consumption probe detects a warning value.
System Power Probe Failure The system is setting actions when a power
consumption probe detects a failure value.
Table B-1. BMC PEF Alert Events (continued)
Event Description
Sample File Formats 247
Sample File Formats
This appendix lists the sample SYSCFG utility .ini, RAIDCFG utility .ini,
and the RACADM utility .ini files.
Sample SYSCFG Utility .ini File Format
[syscfg]
sysname=PowerEdge R805
sysid=0221
biosver=0.2.6
;svctag=VSPT067
;do not edit information above this line
acpower=last
asset=
bootseq=
nic.emb.1,nic.emb.2,nic.emb.3,satacdrom.emb.0,nic.emb
.4
bootseqretry=enable
conboot=enable
conterm=vt100
dbpm=disable
embhypervisor=on
embnic1=on
embnic2=onwithiscsi
embnic3=onwithiscsi
embnic4=onwithiscsi
248 Sample File Formats
extserial=com1
fsbr=115200
integratedsas=enable
internalusb=on
lancfgparams
alertdest=1
destipaddr=0.0.0.0
lancfgparams
alertdest=2
destipaddr=0.0.0.0
lancfgparams
alertdest=3
destipaddr=0.0.0.0
lancfgparams
alertdest=4
destipaddr=0.0.0.0
commstring=public
gateway=192.168.0.1
;ipaddress=192.168.0.120
ipaddrsrc=static
nicselection=dedicated
autoneg=enable
dnsserver1=0.0.0.0
dnsserver2=0.0.0.0
dnsdhcp=disable
dnsracname=megh
Sample File Formats 249
dnsregisterrac=disable
domainname=
domainnamednsdhcp=disable
fullduplex=enable
speed=100Mbps
subnetmask=255.255.255.0
vlanid=1
vlanpriority=0
vlantag=disable
lanchannelaccess
ipmioverlan=alwaysavail
channelprivlmt=administrator
pefalerting=disable
lanuseraccess
userid=2
usrprivlmt=administrator
lanuseraccess
userid=3
usrprivlmt=noaccess
lanuseraccess
userid=4
usrprivlmt=noaccess
lanuseraccess
userid=5
usrprivlmt=noaccess
lanuseraccess
250 Sample File Formats
userid=6
usrprivlmt=noaccess
lanuseraccess
userid=7
usrprivlmt=noaccess
lanuseraccess
userid=8
usrprivlmt=noaccess
lanuseraccess
userid=9
usrprivlmt=noaccess
lanuseraccess
userid=10
usrprivlmt=noaccess
lanuseraccess
userid=11
usrprivlmt=noaccess
lanuseraccess
userid=12
usrprivlmt=noaccess
lanuseraccess
userid=13
usrprivlmt=noaccess
lanuseraccess
userid=14
usrprivlmt=noaccess
Sample File Formats 251
lanuseraccess
userid=15
usrprivlmt=noaccess
lanuseraccess
userid=16
usrprivlmt=noaccess
lcd=default
lcd1=jagan!
memtest=enable
nmibutton=disable
numlock=on
opticaldrivectrl=enable
oswatchdogtimer=enable
pefcfgparams
alertpolnum=1
alertpolstatus=enable
pefcfgparams
alertpolnum=2
alertpolstatus=enable
pefcfgparams
alertpolnum=3
alertpolstatus=enable
pefcfgparams
alertpolnum=4
alertpolstatus=enable
pefcfgparams
252 Sample File Formats
filter=fanfail
filteralert=enable
filteraction=none
pefcfgparams
filter=discretevoltfail
filteralert=enable
filteraction=none
pefcfgparams
filter=tempwarn
filteralert=enable
filteraction=none
pefcfgparams
filter=tempfail
filteralert=enable
filteraction=none
pefcfgparams
filter=intrusion
filteralert=enable
filteraction=none
pefcfgparams
filter=redundegraded
filteralert=enable
filteraction=none
pefcfgparams
filter=redunlost
filteralert=enable
Sample File Formats 253
filteraction=none
pefcfgparams
filter=procwarn
filteralert=enable
filteraction=none
pefcfgparams
filter=procfail
filteralert=enable
filteraction=none
pefcfgparams
filter=powerwarn
filteralert=enable
filteraction=none
pefcfgparams
filter=powerfail
filteralert=enable
filteraction=none
pefcfgparams
filter=hardwarelogfail
filteralert=enable
pefcfgparams
filter=autorecovery
filteralert=enable
pefcfgparams
filter=procabsent
filteralert=enable
254 Sample File Formats
filteraction=none
pefcfgparams
filter=powerabsent
filteralert=enable
filteraction=none
pefcfgparams
filter=batterywarn
filteralert=enable
filteraction=none
pefcfgparams
filter=batteryfail
filteralert=enable
filteraction=none
pefcfgparams
filter=systempowerwarn
filteralert=enable
filteraction=none
pefcfgparams
filter=systempowerfail
filteralert=enable
filteraction=none
hostname=DTK2.4-host
powerbutton=enable
pwdlock=unlock
rptkeyerr=enable
serialcfgparams
Sample File Formats 255
connectionmode=basic
msgcommbitrate=57600
msgcommflowctrl=rtscts
tmcfgdelctrl=bksp
tmcfgechoctrl=echo
tmcfghandshakectrl=enable
tmcfginputnewlineseq=cr
tmcfglineediting=enable
tmcfgnewlineseq=crlf
serialchannelaccess
ipmioverserial=alwaysavail
channelprivlmt=administrator
serialcomm=on
serialuseraccess
userid=2
usrprivlmt=administrator
serialuseraccess
userid=3
usrprivlmt=noaccess
serialuseraccess
userid=4
usrprivlmt=noaccess
serialuseraccess
userid=5
usrprivlmt=noaccess
serialuseraccess
256 Sample File Formats
userid=6
usrprivlmt=noaccess
serialuseraccess
userid=7
usrprivlmt=noaccess
serialuseraccess
userid=8
usrprivlmt=noaccess
serialuseraccess
userid=9
usrprivlmt=noaccess
serialuseraccess
userid=10
usrprivlmt=noaccess
serialuseraccess
userid=11
usrprivlmt=noaccess
serialuseraccess
userid=12
usrprivlmt=noaccess
serialuseraccess
userid=13
usrprivlmt=noaccess
serialuseraccess
userid=14
usrprivlmt=noaccess
Sample File Formats 257
serialuseraccess
userid=15
usrprivlmt=noaccess
serialuseraccess
userid=16
usrprivlmt=noaccess
solaction
userid=2
action=enable
solaction
userid=3
action=disable
solaction
userid=4
action=disable
solaction
userid=5
action=disable
solaction
userid=6
action=disable
solaction
userid=7
action=disable
solaction
userid=8
258 Sample File Formats
action=disable
solaction
userid=9
action=disable
solaction
userid=10
action=disable
solaction
userid=11
action=disable
solaction
userid=12
action=disable
solaction
userid=13
action=disable
solaction
userid=14
action=disable
solaction
userid=15
action=disable
solaction
userid=16
action=disable
solcfgparams
Sample File Formats 259
solbitrate=57600
solcharaccuminterval=10
solcharsendthreshold=220
solenable=enable
solprivlevel=administrator
sysid=0221
sysname=PowerEdge R805
tpm
tpmactivation=nochange
tpmsecurity=onwithoutpbm
usbports=enable
useraction
userid=2
action=enable
useraction
userid=3
action=disable
useraction
userid=4
action=disable
useraction
userid=5
action=disable
useraction
userid=6
action=disable
260 Sample File Formats
useraction
userid=7
action=disable
useraction
userid=8
action=disable
useraction
userid=9
action=disable
useraction
userid=10
action=disable
useraction
userid=11
action=disable
useraction
userid=12
action=disable
useraction
userid=13
action=disable
useraction
userid=14
action=disable
useraction
userid=15
Sample File Formats 261
action=disable
useraction
userid=16
action=disable
username
userid=2
name=root
username
userid=3
name=NULL
username
userid=4
name=NULL
username
userid=5
name=NULL
username
userid=6
name=NULL
username
userid=7
name=NULL
username
userid=8
name=NULL
username
262 Sample File Formats
userid=9
name=NULL
username
userid=10
name=NULL
username
userid=11
name=NULL
username
userid=12
name=NULL
username
userid=13
name=NULL
username
userid=14
name=NULL
username
userid=15
name=NULL
username
userid=16
name=NULL
;uuid=44454C4C530010508054D6C04F303637
virtualization=disable
virtualmedia=enable
Sample File Formats 263
Sample RAIDCFG Utility .ini File Format
[Reset]
controllerid=1,2,3,6
[vdisk0]
controllerid=4
size=139392
raid=1
readpolicy=ra
writepolicy=wb
stripesize=64
cachepolicy=d
adisk=0:1:1,0:0:1
[vdisk1]
controllerid=4
size=139392
raid=1
readpolicy=ra
writepolicy=wb
stripesize=64
cachepolicy=c
adisk=0:3:1,0:2:1
[vdisk2]
controllerid=2
size=278784
raid=0
readpolicy=ra
264 Sample File Formats
writepolicy=wb
stripesize=64
cachepolicy=d
adisk=0:5:1,0:4:1
failoverdrive=0:9:1
[vdisk3]
controllerid=4
size=278784
raid=5
readpolicy=ra
writepolicy=wb
stripesize=64
cachepolicy=c
adisk=0:8:1,0:7:1,0:6:1
[GlobalHotspare0]
controllerid=0
failoverdrive=0:8:0
Sample RACADM Utility .ini File Format
[idRacInfo]
#idRacType=0x05
#idRacProductInfo=Dell Remote Access Controller 4/I
#idRacDescriptionInfo=This system component provides
a complete set of #remote management functions for
Dell PowerEdge servers.
#idRacVersionInfo=1.20 (Build 01.17)
idRacName=DRAC 4/I
Sample File Formats 265
idRacMisc=
[cfgLanNetworking]
cfgNicEnable=1
cfgNicIpAddress=10.98.8.121
cfgNicNetmask=255.255.255.0
cfgNicGateway=192.168.0.1
cfgNicUseDhcp=0
#cfgNicMacAddress=00:11:43:34:5f:4a
cfgDNSServersFromDHCP=0
cfgDNSServer1=192.168.0.5
cfgDNSServer2=192.168.0.6
cfgDNSRegisterRac=0
cfgDNSRacName=RAC-HHS7C1S
cfgDNSDomainNameFromDHCP=0
cfgDNSDomainName=MYDOMAIN
[cfgCurrentLanNetworking]
#cfgNicCurrentIpAddress=10.98.8.121
#cfgNicCurrentNetmask=255.255.255.0
#cfgNicCurrentGateway=192.168.0.1
#cfgNicCurrentDhcpWasUsed=0
#cfgDNSCurrentDhcpWasUsed=0
#cfgDNSCurrentServer1=192.168.0.5
#cfgDNSCurrentServer2=192.168.0.6
#cfgDNSCurrentDomainName=MYDOMAIN
266 Sample File Formats
[cfgRemoteHosts]
cfgRhostsSmtpEmailEnable=1
cfgRhostsFwUpdateTftpEnable=1
cfgRhostsSmtpServerIpAddr=127.0.0.1
cfgRhostsFwUpdateIpAddr=192.168.0.4
cfgRhostsFwUpdatePath=
[cfgUserAdmin]
#cfgUserAdminIndex=1
cfgUserAdminUserName=root
#cfgUserAdminPassword=
cfgUserAdminPrivilege=0
cfgUserAdminAlertFilterRacEventMask=0x300000
cfgUserAdminAlertFilterSysEventMask=0x77777
cfgUserAdminEmailEnable=0
cfgUserAdminEmailAddress=
cfgUserAdminEmailCustomMsg=
[cfgSessionManagement]
cfgSsnMgtMaxSessions=0x4
cfgSsnMgtMaxSessionsPerUser=0x4
[cfgSerial]
cfgSerialBaudRate=115200
cfgSerialConsoleEnable=0
Sample File Formats 267
cfgSerialConsoleQuitKey=<CR>~.
cfgSerialConsoleIdleTimeout=0x12c
cfgSerialConsoleShellType=0x2
cfgSerialConsoleNoAuth=0
cfgSerialConsoleCommand=
cfgSerialTelnetEnable=0
cfgSerialCom2RedirEnable=1
cfgSerialTelnet7fIsBackspace=0
[cfgNetTuning]
cfgNetTuningNicMtu=0x5dc
cfgNetTuningIpTtl=0x40
cfgNetTuningTcpSrttBase=0x0
cfgNetTuningTcpSrttDflt=0x6
cfgNetTuningTcpReXmtMin=0x2
cfgNetTuningTcpReXmtMax=0x80
cfgNetTuningIpSubnetsAreLocal=0x1
cfgNetTuningIpReassTtl=0x3c
cfgNetTuningTcpMsl=0x3c
cfgNetTuningNicAutoneg=1
cfgNetTuningNic100MB=1
cfgNetTuningNicFullDuplex=1
[cfgOobSnmp]
cfgOobSnmpTrapsEnable=1
cfgOobSnmpAgentEnable=1
268 Sample File Formats
cfgOobSnmpAgentCommunity=public
[cfgRacTuning]
cfgRacTuneFwUpdateResetDelay=0x46
cfgRacTuneD3debugEnable=1
cfgRacTuneRemoteRacadmEnable=1
cfgRacTuneHostCom2BaudRate=57600
cfgRacTuneHttpPort=0x50
cfgRacTuneHttpsPort=0x1bb
cfgRacTuneTelnetPort=0x17
cfgRacTuneConRedirPort=0x170c
[ifcRacManagedNodeOs]
ifcRacMnOsHostname=(none)
ifcRacMnOsOsName=Linux 2.4.21-20.ELIhugemem
ifcRacMnOsOsType=0x2
[cfgRacSecurity]
cfgRacSecCsrKeySize=0x400
cfgRacSecCsrCommonName=
cfgRacSecCsrOrganizationName=
cfgRacSecCsrOrganizationUnit=
cfgRacSecCsrLocalityName=
cfgRacSecCsrStateName=
cfgRacSecCsrCountryCode=
cfgRacSecCsrEmailAddr=
Sample File Formats 269
[cfgRacVirtual]
cfgVirAtapiSvrPort=0xe54
cfgVirMediaDisable=0
cfgFloppyEmulation=0
[cfgActiveDirectory]
cfgADRacDomain=
cfgADRacName=
cfgADEnable=0
cfgADAuthTimeout=0x78
cfgADRootDomain=
270 Sample File Formats
Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options 271
Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG
Options
This appendix contains a summary of all the SYSCFG and RAIDCFG
options.
SYSCFG Options
Table D-1 lists all the SYSCFG options and gives a brief description of these
options. For details on these options, see the section, "SYSCFG".
Table D-1. SYSCFG Options
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description Replicated
--envar NA <filename>
<pathname
>
media
should be
writable
When used with the –s
option, this option stores the
environment variable data to
a file so that this file can be
called from other scripts.
-h
or
--help
NA none
or
<valid
option
name>
Without an argument, this
option displays general usage
information for the utility.
No
-i
or
--infile
NA <filename> Directs the SYSCFG utility
to take input from a .ini file.
Yes
-l
or
--logfile
NA <filename> Logs the command line
output to a time-stamped
file.
Yes
272 Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options
-o
or
--outfile
NA <filename> Outputs all replicable
options to the specified
filename. The format of the
output is in a .ini format,
with the utility name as the
section header.
-s NA <string> Prints the variable name and
the value assigned to it to
the console.
--version* NA Displays the version
information, current time,
and date for the utility.
No
--acpower NA on, off, last Specifies the behavior of the
system after AC power is
lost.
Yes
--
adjcacheprefetc
h
NA enable,
disable
Enables the processor to
fetch the cache line
containing the currently
requested data and prefetch
the following cache line or
fetch only the cache line
containing the currently
requested data.
Yes
--assignintr NA standard,
distributed
Controls the interrupt
assignment of PCI devices in
the system.
--asset NA <string> Sets the asset tag value. Yes
--bezelir NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables the ESM
to monitor and log front
bezel intrusion conditions.
Yes
Table D-1. SYSCFG Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description Replicated
Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options 273
--bootseq NA numerical
list,
separated by
commas
or
list of device
names,
separated by
commas
Sets the boot order. Yes (for
systems
that
support a
list of
device
names
only)
--bootseqretry NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables the boot
sequence retry feature.
Yes
--cmosdefaults NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables the
CMOS defaults to be on or
off in the next boot.
Yes
--conboot NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables console
redirection after boot.
Yes
--conred NA off, serial1,
serial2,
bmcsol,
mmb
Sets console redirection to a
particular port.
Yes
--conterm NA vt100, ansi Sets console redirection
terminal type.
Yes
--cpucore NA 1, 2, 4 Allows the user to control
the number of enabled cores
in each processor. The
maximum number of cores
per processor is enabled by
default.
Yes
--cpuxdsupport NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables the
execute disable (XD) feature
of the CPU.
Yes
Table D-1. SYSCFG Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description Replicated
274 Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options
--cstates NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables the
power c states of the
processor.
Available only on xx1x
systems.
Yes
--dbpm NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables demand-
based power management.
Yes
--devseq NA numerical
list,
separated by
commas
or
list of device
names,
separated by
commas
Sets the boot order for hard
drives.
NOTE: This option appears
only if your system is
configured with two or more
bootable storage controllers.
If your system is not
configured with bootable
storage controllers and this
option is included in the
configuration file, the utility
generates a usage error.
Yes (for
systems
that
support a
list of
device
names
only)
--
embhypervisor
NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables the
embedded hypervisor port.
Yes
--embideraid NA on, off Enables or disables the
embedded IDE RAID
controller.
Yes
--embnic1 NA on, off,
onnopxe,
onwithiscsi
Enables or disables the first
embedded network interface
controller (NIC).
Yes
--embnic2 NA on, off,
onnopxe,
onwithiscsi
Enables or disables the
second embedded NIC.
Yes
--embnic3 NA on, off,
onnopxe,
onwithiscsi
Enables or disables the third
embedded NIC.
Yes
Table D-1. SYSCFG Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description Replicated
Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options 275
--embnic4 NA on, off,
onnopxe,
onwithiscsi
Enables or disables the
fourth embedded NIC.
Yes
--embnic1nic2 NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables the
operating system interface of
the first and second
embedded NIC controllers.
Available only on Dell™
PowerEdge™ 1855,
PowerEdge 6850, and xx1x
systems.
Yes
--embnic3nic4 NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables the
operating system interface of
the third and fourth
embedded NIC controllers.
Available only on xx1x
systems.
Yes
--embnics NA on, off Enables or disables the
embedded NICs.
Yes
--embnic1pxe NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables
Pre-boot
eXecution Environment
(
PXE) on the first embedded
NIC.
Yes
--embnic2pxe NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables PXE on
the second embedded NIC.
Yes
--embsataraid NA off,
combined,
ata, raid,
qdma
Configures the embedded
SATA (Serial Advanced
Technology Attachment)
RAID controller.
Yes
--embscsi1 NA on, off Enables or disables the first
SCSI controller.
Yes
--embscsi2 NA on, off Enables or disables the
second SCSI controller.
Yes
Table D-1. SYSCFG Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description Replicated
276 Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options
--embscsiraid NA raid, off, scsi
or
raid, off
Enables or disables the
embedded SCSI RAID
controller.
Yes
--
embscsiraidchb
NA raid, scsi Sets the second channel of
the embedded SCSI RAID
controller to operate in
RAID or SCSI mode.
Yes
--embvideoctrl NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables the
embedded video controller.
Yes
--extserial NA com1, com2,
rad
Sets the behavior of the
external serial connector.
Yes
--fiberchannel NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables
embedded fiber channel.
Yes
--floppy NA auto, off,
readonly
Enables or disables the
diskette drive controller.
Yes
--fsbr NA 115200,
57600,
19200, 9600
Sets the console redirection
fail safe baud rate.
Yes
--hwprefetcher NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables hardware
prefetching by the processor.
Yes
--hddfailover NA off, on Specifies which device in the
hard disk drive sequence
menu is attempted in the
boot sequence.
Yes
-i
or
--infile
NA <filename> Reads BIOS configuration
options from a file. A file can
be generated with the -o
option.
No
--idecdrom NA auto, off Enables or disables the CD
drive controller.
Yes
--idectrl NA auto, off Enables or disables the IDE
controller.
Yes
Table D-1. SYSCFG Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description Replicated
Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options 277
--idracgui NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables iDRAC
GUI.
Yes
--integratedraid NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables the
integrated RAID controller.
Yes
--integratedsas NA enable,
disable
Sets the behavior for the
integrated SAS controller.
Yes
--internalusb NA off, on Enables or disables the
internal USB.
Yes
--ioat NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables the I/O
Acceleration Technology
(I/OAT)\nDMA Engine
option.
Yes
--lcd NA default,
none, user,
idracipv4add
ress,
idracmacadd
ress,
ossystemna
me,
servicetag,
ipv6address,
ambienttem
p,
systemwatts
Selects whether to display
the default string (model
name and number) or a user-
defined string in the front-
panel LCD (Liquid Crystal
Display).
The idracipv4address,
idracmacaddress,
ossystemname, servicetag,
ipv6address, ambienttemp,
and systemwatts arguments
are available only on xx1x
systems.
Yes
Table D-1. SYSCFG Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description Replicated
278 Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options
--lcd1 NA <string> Sets the first line of user-
defined LCD strings.
NOTE: Before setting user
strings for this option, ensure
that --lcd is set to user.
NOTE: If you have a Dell™
PowerEdge™ x6xx, x7xx, or
x8xx system, you need to
reboot your system for the
settings to take effect.
Yes
--lcd2 NA <string> Sets the second line of user-
defined LCD strings.
NOTE: Before setting user
strings for this option, ensure
that --lcd is set to user.
NOTE: If you have a Dell™
PowerEdge™ x6xx, x7xx, or
x8xx system, you need to
reboot your system for the
settings to take effect.
Yes
--logicproc NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables the
logical processor
(Hyperthreading).
Yes
--lpt NA disable, lpt1,
lpt2, lpt3
Disables or sets the parallel
port address.
Yes
--lptmode NA at, ps2 Sets the parallel port mode. Yes
--mem* NA none Reports the size of system
memory.
NOTE: The asterisk is not part
of the command syntax.
Yes
--memintleave NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables the
memory interleave mode.
Yes
Table D-1. SYSCFG Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description Replicated
Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options 279
--
memoperating
mode
NA optimizer,
mirror,
advancedecc
Selects the memory
operating mode. This feature
is active only if a valid
memory configuration is
detected. This option is
available only on xx1x
systems.
Yes
--memremap NA off, auto Enables or disables memory
remapping.
Yes
--memtest NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables the
power-on self-test (POST)
extended memory test.
Yes
--mouse NA on, off Turns the mouse controller
on or off.
Yes
--
noraidprompt*
NA none Disables the POST prompt
message when the SCSI
controller type is changed.
NOTE: The asterisk is not part
of the command syntax.
No
--numlock NA on, off Enables or disables the
keyboard number lock.
Yes
--oldsetuppwd NA <string> Confirms the existing setup
password when setting a new
setup password.
No
--oldsyspwd NA <string> Confirms the existing system
password when setting a new
system password.
No
--
opticaldrivectrl
NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables the
optical CD-ROM controller.
Yes
--osmode NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables the
operating system
installation mode.
Yes
Table D-1. SYSCFG Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description Replicated
280 Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options
--
oswatchdogtim
er
NA enable,
disable
If your system stops
responding, this option aids
in the recovery of your
operating system. When set
to enabled, the operating
system is allowed to initialize
the timer. When set to
disabled (the default), the
timer will have no effect on
the system.
Yes
--ovrwrt* NA none Overwrites the file contents
when used with the -o
option.
NOTE: The asterisk is not part
of the command syntax.
No
power --profile maxperform
ance, osctl,
apc
Displays the settings similar
to the BIOS setup screen for
the respective profile.
Yes
custom Creates the custom profile.
--
cpupowermo
de
min, max,
osdbpm,
systemdbpm
Allows you to set the CPU
power and performance
management to minimum
power, maximum
performance, operating
system DBPM, orsystem
DBPM mode.
--
memorypow
ermode
min, 800,
1067, 1333,
max
Allows you to set memory
power and performance
management to minimum
power or maximum power
mode, or 800Mhz, 1067Mhz,
or 1333Mhz.
Table D-1. SYSCFG Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description Replicated
Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options 281
--
fanpowermo
de
min, max Allows you to set the fan
algorithm to the minimum
power optimized or
maximum performance
optimized mode.
--cap Displays the values of
budgetcap, and the
maximum and minimum
power thresholds in Watts.
--cap --unit <budgetcap
> watt, or
btuphr, or
percent
where
<budgetcap
> is the
limit for
power
consumptio
n in Watts,
or btuphr, or
percent.
The value of <budgetcap>
must be between the
maximum and minimum
threshold values, else an
error is displayed.
--
maxpowerca
p
Displays the value of the
maximum power threshold.
--
minpowerca
p
Displays the value of the
minimum power threshold.
--
valsetuppwd
<string> Validates the setup password
for power authentication. If
you try to change DTK
settings, you will be
prompted to enter this
password to access the
settings.
Table D-1. SYSCFG Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description Replicated
282 Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options
--
setuppwdove
rride
Does not prompt you for a
password to access DTK
settings on systems that do
not have a setup password
configured.
--powerbutton NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables the front
bezel power button.
Yes
--pwdlock NA lock, unlock Enables or disables the
ability to set the system
password.
No
--redmem NA off, spare,
mirror, raid
Sets the redundant memory
mode.
If you perform operations
that change the --redmem
option, you must
immediately reboot the
system. This applies to
command line usage as well
as --infile usage.
Additionally, the --redmem
option should not be issued
with any other command
and should be immediately
followed by a system reboot.
This is important when you
develop scripts that can alter
the --redmem setting.
Not available on xx1x
systems.
Yes
--rptkeyerr NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables the
reporting of keyboard errors
during POST.
Yes
Table D-1. SYSCFG Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description Replicated
Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options 283
--sata0 NA auto, off Enables or disables SATA
port 0.
NOTE: This option maps to
--sata_a for PowerEdge x9xx
systems.
Yes
--sata1 NA auto, off Enables or disables SATA
port 1.
NOTE: This option maps to
--sata_b for PowerEdge x9xx
systems.
Yes
--sata2 NA auto, off Enables or disables SATA
port 2.
NOTE: This option maps to
--sata_c for PowerEdge x9xx
systems.
Yes
--sata3 NA auto, off Enables or disables SATA
port 3.
NOTE: This option maps to
--sata_d for PowerEdge x9xx
systems.
Yes
--sata4 NA auto, off Enables or disables SATA
port 4.
NOTE: This option maps to
--sata_e for PowerEdge x9xx
systems.
Yes
--sata5 NA auto, off Enables or disables SATA
port 5.
NOTE: This option maps to
--sata_f for PowerEdge x9xx
systems.
Yes
Table D-1. SYSCFG Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description Replicated
284 Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options
--sata6 NA auto, off Enables or disables SATA
port 6.
NOTE: This option maps to
--sata_g for PowerEdge x9xx
systems.
Yes
--sata7 NA auto, off Enables or disables SATA
port 7.
NOTE: This option maps to
--sata_h for PowerEdge x9xx
systems.
Yes
--serial1 NA disable,
com1, com3,
com1_bmc,
bmcserial,
bmclan, rac
Sets the behavior for serial
port 1.
Yes
--serial2 NA auto,
disable,
com2, com4
Sets the behavior for serial
port 2.
Yes
--serialcomm NA on, com1cr,
com2cr, off
Sets the behavior of serial
port communication.
Yes
--setuppwd NA <string> Sets the setup password for
the system BIOS.
No
--sma NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables processor
sequential memory access.
Yes
--slot* NA none Reports the slot number for
a modular system.
NOTE: This option is valid for
PowerEdge 1855 systems only.
The asterisk is not part of the
command syntax.
Yes
--snoopfilter NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables the
snoop filter option from the
system BIOS.
Yes
Table D-1. SYSCFG Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description Replicated
Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options 285
--speaker NA on, off Turns the built-in speaker on
or off.
Yes
--svctag* NA none Reports the service tag for
the system.
NOTE: The asterisk is not part
of the command syntax.
No
--syspwd NA <string> Sets the system password for
the system BIOS.
No
tpm --tpmsecurity off,
onwithpbm,
onwithoutpb
m
Configures the TPM security
feature.
Yes
--
tpmactivatio
n
enabled,
disabled,
nochange
Enables or disables the TPM
activation feature.
Yes
--tpmclear NA Clears the contents of the
TPM chip without erasing
the tpmsecurity and
tpmactivation settings.
No
--
undotpmcle
ar
NA Undoes the result of the
tpmclear setting. If you
specify this setting before
specifying the tpmclear
setting, the ‘There is
currently no pending TPM
Clear request’ message is
displayed.
No
--
valsetuppwd
<string> Validates the setup password
for TPM authentication. If
you try to change DTK
settings, you will be
prompted to enter this
password to access the
settings.
No
Table D-1. SYSCFG Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description Replicated
286 Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options
--
setuppwdove
rride
NA On systems that do not have
a setup password configured,
if you set this option, you
will not be prompted for a
password to access DTK
settings.
No
--turbomode NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables core-
based turbo mode.
Yes
--usb NA on, off,
legacy
Enables or disables the USB
port.
Yes
--usbflash NA auto, fdd,
hdd
Sets the emulation of a USB
flash device to auto, diskette
(fdd), or hard drive (hdd).
Yes
--usbports NA enable,
enablebacko
nly, disable
Enables or disables USB
ports.
Yes
--virtualization NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables
virtualization in the CPU.
Yes
--virtualmedia NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables virtual
media in Dell Remote
Access Controllers 5 (DRAC
5).
Yes
bmcversion --devid
--devrevision
--
majorfwrevis
ion
--
minorfwrevis
ion
NA Displays revision
information for the BMC
and the firmware.
--
controlpanelacc
ess
NA viewandmod
ify, viewonly,
disabled
Sets or gets the access level
for the Liquid Crystal
Display (LCD).
Yes
Table D-1. SYSCFG Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description Replicated
Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options 287
--clearsel NA NA Clears the SEL.
--deviceguid NA NA Displays the GUID for the
BMC.
--encryptkey NA <hexadecim
al number>
Encrypts the Intelligent
Platform Management
Interface (IPMI) sessions.
Yes
--identify NA 0–254 Flashes the identification
LED for a specified number
of seconds.
lanchannelacce
ss
or
lca
--pefalerting enable,
disable
disable,
alwaysavail
user,
operator,
administrato
r
Sets or displays the LAN
channel access settings such
as alerting and user privilege
limits.
--
ipmioverlan
--
channelprivl
mt
lanchannelinfo
or
lci
--
mediumtype
NA
NA
NA
NA
Displays media and protocol
information about the LAN
channel.
--prottype
--ssnsupport
--
activessncou
nt
Table D-1. SYSCFG Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description Replicated
288 Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options
lancfgparams
or
lcp
--ipaddrsrc static, dhcp Configures and displays LAN
configuration parameters.
--ipaddress <ipaddress>
--
subnetmask
<subnetmas
k>
--gateway <gateway>
--
commstring
<string>
--destipaddr <destipaddr
ess>
--alertdest 1, 2, 3, 4
--vlantag enable,
disable
--vlanid 0–4095
--vlanpriority 0–7
--macaddress NA
--
nicselection
shared,
sharedfailov
er, dedicated
Table D-1. SYSCFG Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description Replicated
Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options 289
--fullduplex enable,
disable
--autoneg enable,
disable
--speed 10,100
--dnsdhcp enable,
disable
--dnsserver1 <ipaddress>
--dnsserver2 <ipaddress>
--
dnsregisterra
c
enable,
disable
--
dnsracname
<string>
--
domainnam
efromdhcp
enable,
disable
--
domainnam
e
<string>
lanuseraccess
or
lua
--usrprivlmt user,
operator,
administrato
r, noaccess
Configures and displays user
access parameters for the
LAN channel.
Returns the number of User
IDs with fixed names.
--userid 2–10
--
currentenabl
eduserids NA
--
useridswithfi
xednames NA
Table D-1. SYSCFG Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description Replicated
290 Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options
--loaddefaults NA NA Restores the BMC to the
defaults that were originally
loaded on the controller.
This option is used to return
the BMC to a known-good
state.
--nextboot NA <device
name>
Sets the device for the next
boot operation only.
--nmibutton NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables the NMI
button.
passwordaction --action setpassword,
testpassword
Configures and displays
passwords associated with
User IDs.
Table D-1. SYSCFG Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description Replicated
Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options 291
pefcfgparams
or
pcp
--filter fanfail,
voltfail,
discretevoltf
ail,
tempwarn,
tempfail,
intrusion,
redundegrad
ed,
redunlost,
procwarn,
procfail,
powerwarn,
powerfail,
hardwarelogf
ail,
autorecovery
,
batterywarn,
batteryfail,
powerabsent
, procabsent,
systempower
warn,
systempower
fail
Configures and displays PEF
configuration parameters.
See "BMC Platform Events
Filter Alert Messages" for a
complete list of all possible
PEF messages along a
description of each event.
--filteraction powercycle,
reset,
powerdown,
powerreduct
ion, none
--hostname <string>
--filteralert enable,
disable
Table D-1. SYSCFG Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description Replicated
292 Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options
--
alertpolnum
1, 2, 3, 4
--
alertpolstatu
s
enable,
disable
--powerbutton NA enable,
disable
Enables or disables the
power button.
--powerctl NA powerdown
</argument
>
powercycle<
/argument>
reset</argu
ment>
softshutdow
n
</argument
>
Performs a chassis
powerdown and controls the
reset of the system.
--racreset NA NA Resets the RAC. It cannot be
accompanied with any other
option.
No
Table D-1. SYSCFG Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description Replicated
Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options 293
serialchannelac
cess or
sca
--
ipmioverseri
al
disable,
alwaysavail
Sets or displays the channel
access settings for the serial
channel.
--
channelprivl
mt
user,
operator,
administrato
r
serialchannelinfo
or
sci
--
mediumtype
NA Displays serial channel
information.
--prottype NA
--ssnsupport NA
--
activessncou
nt
NA
Table D-1. SYSCFG Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description Replicated
294 Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options
serialcfgparams
or
scp
--
connection
mode
basic,
terminal
Configures and displays
serial configuration
parameters.
NOTE: The BMC firmware
does not support serial port
Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)
configurations.
--
msgcommflo
wctrl
noflowctrl,
rtscts
--
msgcommdt
rhangup
NA
--
msgcommbi
trate
9600, 19200,
57600,
115200
--
tmcfglineedi
ting
enable,
disable
--
tmcfgdelctrl
del, bksp
--
tmcfgechoct
rl
echo,
noecho
--
tmcfghands
hakectrl
enable,
disable
--
tmcfgnewlin
eseq
noterm, crlf,
null, cr, lfcr,
lf
--
tmcfginputn
ewlineseq
cr, null
Table D-1. SYSCFG Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description Replicated
Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options 295
serialuseraccess
or
sua
--usrprivlmt user,
operator,
administrato
r, noaccess
Configures and displays user
access parameters for the
serial channel.
--userid 2–10
--
currentenabl
eduserids
NA
--
useridswithfi
xednames
NA
--solaction Enables or disables Serial-
Over-LAN (SOL) access for
a particular user.
--userid 2–10 if your
system has a
DRAC 4
controller
2–16 if your
system has a
DRAC 5
controller
--action enable,
disable
Table D-1. SYSCFG Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description Replicated
296 Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options
solcfgparams --solenable enable,
disable
Configures and displays SOL
configuration parameters.
--solprivlevel user,
operator,
administrato
r
--
solcharaccu
minterval
1–255
--
solcharsendt
hreshold
1–255
--solbitrate 9600, 19200,
57600,
115200
ssninfo --
maxactivess
ns
NA Displays information about
the number of possible
active sessions and the
number of currently active
sessions on all channels on
the controller.
--
currentactive
ssns
NA
useraction --userid 2–10 Enables and disables User
IDs for the
serialchannelaccess and
lanchannelaccess options.
--action enable,
disable
username --name <string> Assigns user names to a
given User ID and displays
user names associated with a
given User ID.
--userid 2–10
--version NA NA Displays the version
information for the SYSCFG
utility.
Table D-1. SYSCFG Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description Replicated
Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options 297
-b NA <string> Specifies the value to write
to state data.
-r or --read NA NA Reads the value of state data.
-x NA NA Specifies that the state data
value should be in
hexadecimal format.
--asset NA NA Reports the asset tag for a
system.
--biosver NA NA Reports the BIOS version for
a system.
--chassvctag NA NA Reports the chassis service
tag for modular systems.
--cpucount NA NA Reports the number of
processors in a system.
--cpuspeed NA NA Reports the speed of all
processors in a system.
--envfile NA <string> Specifies the input file to use
for resolving PCI vendor,
device, and class codes to
environment variables and
names.
--mem NA NA Reports the amount of
system memory in a system.
--n NA <string> Specifies an input file to use
for resolving PCI vendor and
device numbers to strings.
--ovrwrt NA NA Overwrites the specified file
contents when used with the
-o option.
--pci NA NA Scans all PCI buses and
reports the results.
Table D-1. SYSCFG Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description Replicated
298 Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options
--slot NA NA Reports the slot of a modular
system.
--svctag NA NA Reports the service tag for a
system.
--sysasset NA NA Reports the asset tag for a
server module in a modular
system chassis.
--sysid NA NA Reports the unique system
ID bytes for a system.
--sysname NA NA Reports the system
identification string for a
system.
--syssvctag NA NA Reports the service tag for a
server module in a modular
system chassis.
--uuid NA NA Reports the unique universal
identifier (UUID) for a
system.
lancfgparamsv6 --ipv6 enable,
disable
Loads or unloads the IPv6
stack.
Yes
--ipsrcv6=
static
--ipaddrv6=
<ipv6addres
s> --
prefixlength
v6=
<prefixlengt
hv6>
--
gatewayv6=
<ipv6gatewa
yaddress>
Allows you to manually
configure IPv6 addresses.
Table D-1. SYSCFG Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description Replicated
Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options 299
--ipsrcv6=
auto
Automatically configures the
IPv6 addresses.
--dnssrcv6 =
auto
Automatically configures the
DNS address.
--dnssrcv6=
static --
dnsserver1v6
=
<ipv6dnsser
ver1address
>
Allows you to manually set
the DNS address.
--
linklocaladdr
ipv6=
<linklocalad
dripv6>
Allows you to view IPv6
addresses.
--
gatewayv6=
<gatewayv6
>
Allows you to view IP
gatewayv6 address.
Table D-1. SYSCFG Options (continued)
Options Suboptions Valid
Arguments
Description Replicated
300 Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options
RAIDCFG Options
Table D-2 lists all the RAIDCFG options and gives a brief description of these
options. For details on these options, see the section, "RAIDCFG".
Table D-2. RAIDCFG Short and Long Format Options
Option Valid Arguments Short Description Mandatory or
Optional
No
option
-h
-?
or
/?
NA Displays general usage information
for the utility. The usage information
consists of a comprehensive list of
valid options, parameters, and
arguments.
Optional.
See Table 4-1 for
specific usage
information.
-ac
or
action
cvd
or
createvdisk
Creates a virtual disk.
NOTE: When providing multiple
physical disks for the createvdisk
command, do not separate the disks
with spaces. For example, -ad=1:4,
1:5 causes an error. The correct
syntax for displaying multiple physical
disks is -ad=1:4,1:5,1:6.
See Table 4-4 for
specific usage
information.
-ac
or
action
dvd
or
deletevdisk
Deletes a virtual disk. See Table 4-9 for
specific usage
information.
-ad
or
adisk
NA Specifies an array disk command. See Table 4-5 for
specific usage
information.
Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options 301
-ad
or
adisk
ch:targ, ch:targ, ...
or ch:targ:lun,...
or ch:targ:enc
channel:target, or
channel:target:lu
n, or
channel:target:en
closure
Specifies an array disk.
For SCSI controllers, the value of lun
should always be 0.
For SAS controllers, the value of
enclosure can be non-zero, in which
case you need to specify values for
channel, target, and enclosure.
NOTE: You can also use pdisk or -pd
instead of adisk or -ad to specify an
array disk.
Optional.
See Table 4-5 for
specific usage
information.
-c
or
controlle
rid
<valid controller
ID number>
Specifies a RAID controller. See Table 4-3 for
specific usage
information.
-cp
or
cachepol
icy
d, c Specifies the virtual disk cache policy. Optional.
See Table 4-4 for
specific usage
information.
-ctrl
or
controller
NA Displays a list of the supported RAID
controllers in the system, along with
select property information.
Mandatory, must
be typed in the
correct order.
See Table 4-3 for
specific usage
information.
-envc
or
envcom
mand
<string> Sets a user-defined environmental
variable (<string>) to the value
returned from a function call.
See Table 4-11
for specific usage
information.
-envn
or
envname
<string> Sets the environment variable
(<string>) that equates to the value
returned from a function call.
See Table 4-11
for specific usage
information.
Table D-2. RAIDCFG Short and Long Format Options (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Short Description Mandatory or
Optional
302 Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options
-fd
or
failoverd
rive
ch:targ, ch:targ, ...
or ch:targ:lun,...
or ch:targ:enc
channel:target, or
channel:target:lu
n, or
channel:target:en
closure
Specifies the location of the failover
drive in an array.
For SCSI controllers, the value of lun
should always be 0.
For SAS controllers, the value of
enclosure can be non-zero, in which
case you need to specify values for
channel, target, and enclosure.
NOTE: From DTK 2.4 onwards, the -fd
option creates dedicated hot spares
instead of global hot spares. To set
global hot spares, see Table 4-10.
Optional.
See Table 4-4 for
specific usage
information.
-i <filename> Reads the RAID configuration
information from the given .ini
filename and creates the RAID
configurations on the specified
controllers.
Mandatory.
See Table 4-13
for specific usage
information.
-l
or
logfile
<filename> Logs command line output to a file. Optional.
See Table 4-14
for specific usage
information.
-o <filename> Reads the RAID configurations from
all available controllers and write
these configurations in the given .ini
filename.
Mandatory.
See Table 4-13
for specific usage
information.
-r
or
raid
<valid RAID level
number>
Sets the RAID level for the array.
Valid RAID values are 0, 1, 5, 10, 50.
If no value is specified for RAID, 0 is
taken as the default level.
Optional.
See Table 4-4 for
specific usage
information.
Table D-2. RAIDCFG Short and Long Format Options (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Short Description Mandatory or
Optional
Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options 303
-rp
or
readpoli
cy
ra, ara, nra, rc, nrc Sets the read policy for the virtual
disk.
Optional.
See Table 4-4 for
specific usage
information.
-se
or
setenviro
nment
NA Sets a user-defined environment
variable to the value returned from
the function call. Function calls are:
getcontrollerslots,
getfirmware,
getcontrollertype,
getadisks, getadiskcount,
getfreeadisks,
getfreeadiskcount,
getfreeadisksize,
gethotspares.
Mandatory.
See Table 4-11
for specific usage
information.
-si
or
silent
NA Does not display any information on
the terminal console.
Optional.
See Table 4-14
for specific usage
information.
-sz
or
size
<number> Sets the maximum size on the virtual
disk in MB or GB if the size is not
provided.
The default size is in MB. If GB
follows the number, the size is
expressed in GB.
Optional.
See Table 4-4 for
specific usage
information.
-sp
or
spanleng
th
<number> The span size of RAID 5, which is a
mandatory parameter for RAID 50.
NOTE: Spanlength is applicable only
for RAID 50. The minimum permissible
spanlength value is 3. The number of
array disks for creating virtual disks
should not be a prime number and
should be divisible by the specified
spanlength.
Mandatory.
See Table 4-4 for
specific usage
information.
Table D-2. RAIDCFG Short and Long Format Options (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Short Description Mandatory or
Optional
304 Summary of SYSCFG and RAIDCFG Options
-ssz
or
stripesiz
e
<number> Sets the stripe size on the virtual disk
in KB.
NOTE: When creating virtual disks, do
not specify the units for chunk (stripe)
size. The units are always listed in KB.
Optional.
See Table 4-4 for
specific usage
information.
-vd
or
vdisk
NA Displays the virtual disks under all of
the controllers along with the physical
array disks that make up the virtual
disks.
See Table 4-6 for
specific usage
information.
-vd
or
vdisk
<valid virtual
disk ID number>
Displays the specified virtual disk. Optional.
See Table 4-6 for
specific usage
information.
-ver
or
version
NA Displays the version number of the
utility.
Optional.
See Table 4-14
for specific usage
information.
-wp
or
writepoli
cy
wb, wt, wc, nwc Sets the write policy for a virtual disk.
The valid arguments are: wb (write-
back caching),
wt (write-through caching), wc (write-
caching), and nwc (no-write-caching).
Optional.
See Table 4-14
for specific usage
information.
Table D-2. RAIDCFG Short and Long Format Options (continued)
Option Valid Arguments Short Description Mandatory or
Optional
Glossary 305
Glossary
The following list defines or identifies technical terms, abbreviations,
and acronyms used in your system documents.
A
Abbreviation for ampere(s).
AC
Abbreviation for alternating current.
AC power switch
A switch with two AC power inputs that provides AC power redundancy by failing
over to a standby AC input in the event of a failure to the primary AC input.
access
Refers to the actions a user can take on a variable value. Examples include
read-only and read-write.
ACL
Abbreviation for access control list. ACL files are text files that contain lists that
define who can access resources stored on a Novell
®
Web server.
adapter card
An expansion card that plugs into an expansion-card connector on the system's
system board. An adapter card adds some specialized function to the system by
providing an interface between the expansion bus and a peripheral device.
Examples of adapter cards include network cards, sound cards, and SCSI adapters.
ADB
Abbreviation for assign database.
AGP
Abbreviation for advanced graphics port.
ANSI
Abbreviation for American National Standards Institute.
306 Glossary
API
Abbreviation for application program interface, which is a set of routines,
protocols, and tools for building software applications that act as an interface
between the operating system and application programs.
argument
The value supplied with an option, such as in the following command line
instance:
utilname --option=argument
ARP
Acronym for Address Resolution Protocol, which is a method for finding a host’s
Ethernet address from its Internet address.
ASCII
Acronym for American Standard Code for Information Interchange. A text file
containing only characters from the ASCII character set (usually created with a
text editor, such as Notepad in Microsoft
®
Windows
®
), is called an ASCII file.
ASIC
Acronym for application-specific integrated circuit.
ASPI
Acronym for advanced SCSI programming interface.
asset tag code
An individual code assigned to a system, usually by a system administrator, for
security or tracking purposes.
attribute
As it relates to DMI, an attribute is a piece of information related to a component.
Attributes can be combined to form groups. If an attribute is defined as read-write,
it may be defined by a management application.
autoexec.bat file
The
autoexec.bat
file is executed when you boot your system (after executing any
commands in the
config.sys
file). This start-up file contains commands that
define the characteristics of each device connected to your system, and it finds
and executes programs stored in locations other than the active directory.
Glossary 307
backup
A copy of a program or data file. As a precaution, you should back up your system's
hard drive on a regular basis. Before making a change to the configuration of your
system, you should back up important start-up files from your operating system.
baud rate
A measurement of data transmission speed. For example, modems are designed
to transmit data at one or more specified baud rate(s) through the COM (serial)
port of a system.
beep code
A diagnostic message in the form of a pattern of beeps from your system's speaker.
For example, one beep, followed by a second beep, and then a burst of three beeps
is beep code 1-1-3.
BGA
Abbreviation for ball grid array, an integrated circuit (IC) package that uses an
array of solder balls, instead of pins, to connect to a system board.
binary
A base-2 numbering system that uses 0 and 1 to represent information. The system
performs operations based on the ordering and calculation of these numbers.
BIOS
Acronym for basic input/output system. Your system's BIOS contains programs
stored on a flash memory chip. The BIOS controls the following:
• Communications between the microprocessor and peripheral devices, such as
the keyboard and the video adapter
• Miscellaneous functions, such as system messages
bit
The smallest unit of information interpreted by your system.
BMC
Abbreviation for baseboard management controller, which is the controller
interface between the RAC and the managed system’s ESM.
308 Glossary
boot routine
When you start your system, it clears all memory, initializes devices, and loads
the operating system. Unless the operating system fails to respond, you can reboot
(also called warm boot) your system by pressing <Ctrl><Alt><Del>;
otherwise, you must perform a cold boot by pressing the reset button or by turning
the system off and then back on.
bootable diskette
You can start your system from a diskette. To make a bootable diskette on a system
running Windows, insert a diskette in the diskette drive, type
sys a:
at the
command line prompt, and press <Enter>. Use this bootable diskette if your
system does not boot from the hard drive.
bpi
Abbreviation for bits per inch.
bps
Abbreviation for bits per second.
BTU
Abbreviation for British thermal unit.
bus
An information pathway between the components of a system. Your system
contains an expansion bus that allows the microprocessor to communicate with
controllers for all the various peripheral devices connected to the system. Your
system also contains an address bus and a data bus for communication between
the microprocessor and RAM.
byte
Eight contiguous bits of information, the basic data unit used by your system.
C
Abbreviation for Celsius.
CA
Abbreviation for certification authority.
Glossary 309
cache
A fast storage area that keeps a copy of data or instructions for quicker data retrieval.
For example, your system's BIOS may cache ROM code in faster RAM. Or, a
disk-cache utility may reserve RAM in which to store frequently accessed
information from your system's disk drives; when a program makes a request to a
disk drive for data that is in the cache, the disk-cache utility can retrieve the data
from RAM faster than from the disk drive.
capability
Refers to the actions that an object can perform, or actions that can be taken on
a managed object. For example, if a card is hot-pluggable, it is capable of being
replaced while the system power is on.
CDRAM
Abbreviation for cached DRAM, which is a high-speed DRAM memory chip
developed by Mitsubishi that includes a small SRAM cache.
CD-ROM
Abbreviation for compact disc read-only memory. CD drives use optical
technology to read data from CDs. CDs are read-only storage devices; you cannot
write new data to a CD with standard CD drives.
CHAP
Acronym for Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol, an authentication
scheme used by PPP servers to validate the identity of the originator of the
connection upon connection or any time later.
m for Challenge-Handshake Authentication chip
chip
A set of microminiaturized, electronic circuits that are designed for use as
processors and memory in systems. Small chips can hold from a handful to tens
of thousands of transistors. They look like tiny chips of aluminum, no more than
1/16 inch square by 1/30 inch thick, which is where the term
chip
came from.
Large chips, which can be more than a half inch square, hold millions of
transistors. It is actually only the top one thousandth of an inch of a chip's surface
that holds the circuits. The rest of it is just a base.
310 Glossary
CIM
Acronym for Common Information Model, which is a model for describing
management information from the DMTF. CIM is implementation independent,
allowing different management applications to collect the required data from a
variety of sources. CIM includes schemas for systems, networks, applications and
devices, and new schemas will be added. It provides mapping techniques for
interchange of CIM data with MIB data from SNMP agents.
CIMOM
Acronym for common information model object manager.
CI/O
Abbreviation for comprehensive input/output.
CLI
Abbreviation for command line interface.
CMOS
Acronym for complementary metal-oxide semiconductor. In systems, CMOS
memory chips are often used for NVRAM storage.
command
The combination of an option and argument or just an option if no argument is
required, such as in the following command line instances:
utilname --option
utilname --option=argument
command line example
A series of valid commands, options, and arguments typed in the command line.
For example, the DTK utility name and all necessary options and arguments as
they are entered through the operating system shell:
A:>utilname --option --option=argument
COMn
The device names for the first through fourth serial ports on your system are
COM1, COM2, COM3, and COM4. The default interrupt for COM1 and COM3
is IRQ4, and the default interrupt for COM2 and COM4 is IRQ3. Therefore, you
must be careful when configuring software that runs a serial device so that you
don't create an interrupt conflict.
Glossary 311
config.sys file
The
config.sys
file is executed when you boot your system (before running any
commands in the
autoexec.bat
file). This start-up file contains commands that
specify which devices to install and which drivers to use. This file also contains
commands that determine how the operating system uses memory and controls
files.
ConsoleOne
Novell ConsoleOne is a Java-based foundation for graphical utilities that manage
and administer network resources from different locations and platforms.
ConsoleOne provides a single point of control for all Novell and external products.
console redirection
Console redirection is a function that directs a managed system’s display screen,
mouse functions, and keyboard functions to the corresponding devices on a
management station. You may then use the management station’s system console
to control the managed system.
controller
A chip that controls the transfer of data between the microprocessor and memory
or between the microprocessor and a peripheral device such as a disk drive or the
keyboard.
control panel
The part of the system that contains indicators and controls, such as the power
switch, hard drive access indicator, and power indicator.
conventional memory
The first 640 KB of RAM. Conventional memory is found in all systems. Unless
they are specially designed, MS-DOS
®
programs are limited to running in
conventional memory.
COO
Abbreviation for cost of ownership.
cooling unit
Sets of fans or other cooling devices in a system chassis.
312 Glossary
coprocessor
A chip that relieves the system's microprocessor of specific processing tasks. A
math coprocessor, for example, handles numeric processing. A graphics
coprocessor handles video rendering. The Intel
®
Pentium
®
microprocessor, for
example, includes a built-in math coprocessor.
cpi
Abbreviation for characters per inch.
CPU
Abbreviation for central processing unit.
See
also microprocessor.
CRC
Abbreviation for cyclic redundancy code, which is a number derived from, and
stored or transmitted with, a block of data in order to detect corruption. By
recalculating the CRC and comparing it to the value originally transmitted, the
receiver can detect some types of transmission errors.
CSR
Abbreviation for certificate signing request.
cursor
A marker, such as a block, underscore, or pointer that represents the position at
which the next keyboard or mouse action will occur.
DAT
Acronym for digital audio tape.
dB
Abbreviation for decibel(s).
dBA
Abbreviation for adjusted decibel(s).
DC
Abbreviation for direct current.
Glossary 313
device driver
A program that allows the operating system or some other program to interface
correctly with a peripheral device, such as a printer. Some device drivers—such
as network drivers—must be loaded from the
config.sys
file (with a device=
statement) or as memory-resident programs (usually, from the
autoexec.bat
file).
Others—such as video drivers—must load when you start the program for which
they were designed.
DHCP
Abbreviation for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, a protocol that provides
a means to dynamically allocate IP addresses to computers on a LAN.
DIMM
Acronym for dual in-line memory module. A small circuit board containing
DRAM chips that connects to the system board.
DIN
Acronym for Deutsche Industrie Norm, which is the standards-setting
organization for Germany. A DIN connector is one that conforms to one of the
many standards defined by DIN. DIN connectors are used widely in personal
computers. For example, the keyboard connector for personal computers is a
DIN connector.
DIP
Acronym for dual in-line package. A circuit board, such as a system board or
expansion card, may contain DIP switches for configuring the circuit board.
DIP switches are always toggle switches, with an on and an off position.
directory
Directories help keep related files organized on a disk in an hierarchical, inverted
tree structure. Each disk has a root directory; for example, a
C:\>
prompt normally
indicates that you are at the root directory of hard drive C. Additional directories
that branch off of the root directory are called subdirectories. Subdirectories may
contain additional directories branching off of them.
display adapter
See
video adapter.
DKS
Abbreviation for dynamic kernel support.
314 Glossary
DMA
Abbreviation for direct memory access. A DMA channel allows certain types of
data transfer between RAM and a device to bypass the microprocessor.
DMTF
Abbreviation for Distributed Management Task Force, a consortium of
companies representing hardware and software providers.
dpi
Abbreviation for dots per inch.
DRAM
Acronym for dynamic random-access memory. A system's RAM is usually made
up entirely of DRAM chips. Because DRAM chips cannot store an electrical charge
indefinitely, your system continually refreshes each DRAM chip in the system.
drive-type number
Your system can recognize a number of specific hard drives. Each is assigned a
drive-type number that is stored in NVRAM. The hard drive(s) specified in your
system's System Setup program must match the actual drive(s) installed in the
system. The System Setup program also allows you to specify physical parameters
(logical cylinders, logical heads, cylinder number, and logical sectors per pack) for
drives not included in the table of drive types stored in NVRAM.
DSU
Abbreviation for disk storage unit.
DTE
Abbreviation for data terminal equipment. Any device, such as a computer system,
that can send data in digital form by means of a cable or communication line.
The DTE is connected to the cable or communication line through a data
communication equipment (DCE) device, such as a modem.
ECC
Abbreviation for error checking and correction.
ECP
Abbreviation for Extended Capabilities Port.
Glossary 315
EDO
Acronym for extended data output dynamic random access memory which is a
type of DRAM that is faster than conventional DRAM. EDO RAM can start
fetching the next block of memory at the same time that it sends the previous
block to the microprocessor.
EEPROM
Acronym for electrically erasable programmable read-only memory.
EIDE
Abbreviation for enhanced integrated drive electronics. EIDE devices add one or
more of the following enhancements to the traditional IDE standard:
• Data transfer rates of up to 16 MB/sec
• Support for drives other than just hard drives, such as CD and tape drives
• Support for hard drives with capacities greater than 528 MB
• Support for up to two controllers, each with up to two devices attached
EISA
Acronym for Extended Industry-Standard Architecture, a 32-bit expansion-bus
design. The expansion-card connectors in an EISA system are also compatible
with 8- or 16-bit ISA expansion cards.
To avoid a configuration conflict when installing an EISA expansion card, you
must use the EISA Configuration Utility. This utility allows you to specify which
expansion slot contains the card and obtains information about the card's required
system resources from a corresponding EISA configuration file.
EMC
Abbreviation for electromagnetic compatibility.
EMI
Abbreviation for electromagnetic interference.
EMM
Abbreviation for expanded memory manager. A utility that uses extended
memory to emulate expanded memory.
EMS
Abbreviation for Expanded Memory Specification.
316 Glossary
EPP
Abbreviation for Enhanced Parallel Port which provides improved bidirectional
data transmission. Many devices are designed to take advantage of the
EPP standard, especially devices, such as network or SCSI adapters that connect
to the parallel port of a portable computer.
EPROM
Acronym for erasable programmable read-only memory.
ESD
Abbreviation for electrostatic discharge.
ESM
Abbreviation for embedded systems management, which is a set of instruction
coding in system software and firmware that notifies a user about potential
hardware problems on a system.
expanded memory
A technique for accessing RAM above 1 MB. To enable expanded memory on
your system, you must use an EMM. You should configure your system to support
expanded memory only if you run application programs that can use (or require)
expanded memory.
expansion bus
Your system contains an expansion bus that allows the microprocessor to
communicate with controllers for peripheral devices, such as a network card or
an internal modem.
expansion-card connector
A connector on the system's system board or riser board for plugging in an
expansion card.
extended memory
RAM above 1 MB. Most software that can use it, such as the Windows operating
system, requires that extended memory be under the control of an XMM.
external cache memory
A RAM cache using SRAM chips. Because SRAM chips operate at several times
the speed of DRAM chips, the microprocessor can retrieve data and instructions
faster from external cache memory than from RAM.
Glossary 317
FAT
Acronym for file allocation table. FAT and FAT32 are file systems that are defined
as follows:
• FAT — A file system used by MS-DOS, Windows 3.x, Windows 95, and
Windows 98. Windows NT® and Windows 2000 also can use the FAT file
system. The operating system maintains a table to keep track of the status of
various segments of disk space used for file storage.
• FAT32 — A derivative of the FAT file system. FAT32 supports smaller cluster sizes
than FAT, thus providing more efficient space allocation on FAT32 drives.
• FAT16 — A derivative of the FAT file system. A volume using FAT16 can hold a
maximum of 65,526 clusters. FAT16 is used for hard disk volumes ranging in size
from 16 MB to 2,048 MB.
FEPROM
Acronym for flash erasable programmable read-only memory. Flash memory is a
kind of nonvolatile storage device similar to EEPROM, but the erasing is done
only in blocks or the entire chip.
Fibre Channel
A data transfer interface technology that allows for high-speed I/O and networking
functionality in a single connectivity technology. The Fibre Channel Standard
supports several topologies, including Fibre Channel Point-to-Point, Fibre
Channel Fabric (generic switching topology), and Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop
(FC_AL).
firmware
Software (programs or data) that has been written onto read-only memory
(ROM). Firmware can boot and operate a device. Each controller contains
firmware which helps provide the controller's functionality.
flash BIOS
A BIOS that is stored in flash memory rather than in ROM. A flash BIOS chip
can be updated in place, whereas a ROM BIOS must be replaced with a
newer chip.
flash memory
A type of EEPROM chip that can be reprogrammed from a utility on diskette
while still installed in a system; most EEPROM chips can only be rewritten with
special programming equipment.
318 Glossary
format
To prepare a hard drive or diskette for storing files. An unconditional format
deletes all data stored on the disk.
FPBGA
Abbreviation for field programmable gate array, a programmable logic chip (PLD)
with a high density of gates.
FRU
Abbreviation for field replaceable unit.
ft
Abbreviation for feet.
FTP
Abbreviation for file transfer protocol.
FQDN
Abbreviation for fully qualified domain name. It consists of a host and domain
name, including top-level domain.
Example:
www.webopedia.com
.
www
is the host,
webopedia
is the second-level domain, and
.com
is the top-level
domain.
function commands
Commands that specify an action to be performed.
G
Abbreviation for gravities.
GB
Abbreviation for gigabyte(s). A gigabyte equals 1024 megabytes or 1,073,741,824
bytes.
gcc
Abbreviation for gnu C complier.
Glossary 319
GMT
Abbreviation for Greenwich Mean Time, which is the standard time common to
every place in the world. GMT nominally reflects the mean solar time along the
prime meridian (0 longitude) that runs through the Greenwich Observatory
outside of London, UK.
graphics coprocessor
See
coprocessor.
graphics mode
A video mode that can be defined as x horizontal by y vertical pixels by z colors.
GUI
Acronym for graphical user interface.
GUID
Globally unique identifier. A 16-byte identifier based on the host's network
interface card (NIC) address and time stamp.
h
Abbreviation for hexadecimal. A base-16 numbering system, often used in
programming to identify addresses in the system's RAM and I/O memory
addresses for devices. The sequence of decimal numbers from 0 through 16, for
example, is expressed in hexadecimal notation as: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B,
C, D, E, F, 10. In text, hexadecimal numbers are often followed by h.
HBA
Abbreviation for host bus adapter. A PCI adapter card that resides in the system
whose only function is to convert data commands from PCI-bus format to storage
interconnect format (examples: SCSI, Fibre Channel) and communicate directly
with hard drives, tape drives, CD drives, or other storage devices.
heat sink
A metal plate with metal pegs or ribs that help dissipate heat. Most
microprocessors include a heat sink.
HMA
Abbreviation for high memory area. The first 64 KB of extended memory above
1 MB. A memory manager that conforms to the XMS can make the HMA a direct
extension of conventional memory.
Also
see
XMM.
320 Glossary
host adapter
A host adapter implements communication between the system's bus and the
controller for a peripheral device. (hard drive controller subsystems include
integrated host adapter circuitry.) To add a SCSI expansion bus to your system,
you must install or connect the appropriate host adapter.
hot plug
The ability to remove and replace a redundant part while the system is still
running. Also called a
hot spare.
HPFS
Abbreviation for the High Performance File System option in the Windows NT
operating systems.
HTTP
Abbreviation for Hypertext Transfer Protocol. HTTP is the client-server TCP/IP
protocol used on the World Wide Web for the exchange of HTML documents.
HTTPS
Abbreviation for HyperText Transmission Protocol, Secure. HTTPS is a variant
of HTTP used by Web browsers for handling secure transactions. HTTPS is a
unique protocol that is simply SSL underneath HTTP. You need to use https://
for HTTP URLs with SSL, whereas you continue to use http:// for HTTP URLs
without SSL.
Hz
Abbreviation for hertz.
ICES
Abbreviation for Interface-Causing Equipment Standard (in Canada).
ICMB
Abbreviation for Intelligent Chassis Management Bus.
ICMP
Abbreviation for Internet Control Message Protocol. ICMP is a TCP/IP protocol
used to send error and control messages.
ICU
Abbreviation for ISA Configuration Utility.
Glossary 321
ID
Abbreviation for identifier, commonly used when referring to a user identifier
(user ID), object identifier (object ID), or hardware identifier (controller ID).
IDE
Abbreviation for Integrated Drive Electronics. IDE is a computer system
interface, used primarily for hard drives and CDs.
I/O
Abbreviation for input/output. The keyboard is an input device, and a printer is
an output device. In general, I/O activity can be differentiated from
computational activity. For example, when a program sends a document to the
printer, it is engaging in output activity; when the program sorts a list of terms,
it is engaging in computational activity.
IHV
Abbreviation for independent hardware vendor. IHVs often develop their own
MIBs for components that they manufacture.
interlacing
A technique for increasing video resolution by only updating alternate horizontal
lines on the screen. Because interlacing can result in noticeable screen flicker,
most users prefer noninterlaced video adapter resolutions.
internal microprocessor cache
An instruction and data cache built in to the microprocessor. The Intel Pentium
microprocessor includes a 16-KB internal cache, which is set up as an 8-KB
read-only instruction cache and an 8-KB read/write data cache.
IP address
Abbreviation for Internet Protocol address.
See
TCP/IP.
IPMB
Abbreviation for intelligent platform management bus, which is a bus used in
systems management technology.
IPMI
Abbreviation for Intelligent Platform Management Interface, which is a part of
systems management technology.
322 Glossary
IPX
Abbreviation for internetwork packet exchange.
IRQ
Abbreviation for interrupt request. A signal that data is about to be sent to or
received by a peripheral device travels by an IRQ line to the microprocessor. Each
peripheral connection must be assigned an IRQ number. For example, the first
serial port in your system (COM1) is assigned to IRQ4 by default. Two devices
can share the same IRQ assignment, but you cannot operate both devices
simultaneously.
ISA
Acronym for Industry-Standard Architecture. A 16-bit expansion bus design. The
expansion-card connectors in an ISA system are also compatible with 8-bit ISA
expansion cards.
ISV
Abbreviation for independent software vendor.
ITE
Abbreviation for information technology equipment.
Java
A cross-platform programming language developed by Sun Microsystems.
JSSE
Abbreviation for Java Secure Socket Extension.
jumper
Jumpers are small blocks on a circuit board with two or more pins emerging from
them. Plastic plugs containing a wire fit down over the pins. The wire connects
the pins and creates a circuit. Jumpers provide a simple and reversible method of
changing the circuitry in a printed circuit board.
K
Abbreviation for kilo-, indicating 1000.
KB
Abbreviation for kilobyte(s), 1024 bytes.
Glossary 323
KB/sec
Abbreviation for kilobyte(s) per second.
Kbit(s)
Abbreviation for kilobit(s), 1024 bits.
Kbit(s)/sec
Abbreviation for kilobit(s) per second.
key combination
A command requiring you to press multiple keys at the same time. For example,
you can reboot your system by pressing the <Ctrl><Alt><Del> key combination.
kHz
Abbreviation for kilohertz, 1000 hertz.
LAN
Acronym for local area network. A LAN system is usually confined to the same
building or a few nearby buildings, with all equipment linked by wiring dedicated
specifically to the LAN.
lb
Abbreviation for pound(s).
LCC
Abbreviation for leaded or leadless chip carrier.
LCD
Abbreviation for liquid crystal display.
A type of display used in many portable computers. LCDs utilize two sheets of
polarizing material with a liquid crystal solution between them. An electric current
passed through the liquid causes the crystals to align so that light cannot pass
through them. Each crystal, therefore, is like a shutter, either allowing light to
pass through or blocking the light.
LIF
Acronym for low insertion force. Some systems use LIF sockets and connectors
to allow devices, such as the microprocessor chip, to be installed or removed with
minimal stress to the device.
324 Glossary
LED
Abbreviation for light-emitting diode. An electronic device that lights up when a
current is passed through it.
local bus
On a system with local-bus expansion capability, certain peripheral devices (such
as the video adapter circuitry) can be designed to run much faster than they would
with a traditional expansion bus. Some local-bus designs allow peripherals to run
at the same speed and with the same width data path as the system's
microprocessor.
LPTn
The device names for the first through third parallel printer ports on your system
are LPT1, LPT2, and LPT3.
LRA
Abbreviation for local response agent.
mA
Abbreviation for milliampere(s).
MAC
Acronym for media access control, which is a network sublayer between a network
node and the network physical layer.
MAC address
Acronym for media access control address, which is a unique address embedded
in the physical components of a NIC.
mAh
Abbreviation for milliampere-hour(s).
managed system
A managed system is any system that is monitored and managed using Server
Administrator. Systems running Server Administrator can be managed locally or
remotely through a supported Web browser.
See
remote management system.
math coprocessor
See
coprocessor.
Glossary 325
Mb
Abbreviation for megabit.
MB
Abbreviation for megabyte(s). The term megabyte means 1,048,576 bytes;
however, when referring to hard drive storage, the term is often rounded to mean
1,000,000 bytes.
MB/sec
Abbreviation for megabytes per second.
Mbps
Abbreviation for megabits per second.
MBR
Abbreviation for master boot record.
MCA
Abbreviation for Micro Channel Architecture, which is designed for
multiprocessing. MCA eliminates potential conflicts that arise when installing new
peripheral devices. MCA is not compatible with either EISA or XT bus architecture,
so older cards cannot be used with it.
memory
A system can contain several different forms of memory, such as RAM, ROM,
and video memory. Frequently, the word memory is used as a synonym for RAM;
for example, an unqualified statement such as "a system with 16 MB of memory"
refers to a system with 16 MB of RAM.
memory address
A specific location, usually expressed as a hexadecimal number, in the system's
RAM.
memory manager
A utility that controls the implementation of memory in addition to conventional
memory, such as extended or expanded memory.
memory module
A small circuit board containing DRAM chips that connects to the system board.
326 Glossary
MHz
Abbreviation for megahertz.
MIB
Acronym for management information base. The MIB is used to send detailed
status/commands from or to an SNMP managed device.
microprocessor
The primary computational chip inside the system that controls the interpretation
and execution of arithmetic and logic functions. Software written for one
microprocessor must usually be revised to run on another microprocessor. CPU
is a synonym for microprocessor.
MIDI
Acronym for musical instrument digital interface.
modem
A device that allows your system to communicate with other systems over
telephone lines.
modular system
A system that can include multiple server modules. Each server module functions
as an individual system. To function as a system, a server module is inserted into
a chassis which includes power supplies, fans, a system management module, and
at least one network switch module. The power supplies, fans, system
management module, and network switch module are shared resources of the
server modules in the chassis.
See
server module.
MOF
Acronym for managed object format, which is an ASCII file that contains the
formal definition of a CIM schema.
mouse
A pointing device that controls the movement of the cursor on a screen. Mouse-
aware software allows you to activate commands by clicking a mouse button while
pointing at objects displayed on the screen.
MPEG
Acronym for Motion Picture Experts Group. MPEG is a digital video file format.
Glossary 327
ms
Abbreviation for millisecond(s).
MTBF
Abbreviation for mean time between failures.
multifrequency monitor
A monitor that supports several video standards. A multifrequency monitor can
adjust to the frequency range of the signal from a variety of video adapters.
mV
Abbreviation for millivolt(s).
name
The name of an object or variable is the exact string that identifies it in an SNMP
Management Information Base (MIB) file or in a CIM Management Object File
(MOF).
NDIS
Abbreviation for Network Driver Interface Specification.
NDS
Abbreviation for NetWare
®
Directory Structure.
NIC
Acronym for network interface controller.
NICI
Abbreviation for NetWare International Cryptographic Infrastructure.
NIF
Acronym for network interface function. This term is equivalent to NIC.
NLM
Abbreviation for NetWare Loadable Module.
NMI
Abbreviation for nonmaskable interrupt. A device sends an NMI to signal the
microprocessor about hardware errors, such as a parity error.
328 Glossary
noninterlaced
A technique for decreasing screen flicker by sequentially refreshing each horizontal
line on the screen.
ns
Abbreviation for nanosecond(s), one billionth of a second.
NTFS
Abbreviation for the Windows NT File System option in the Windows NT
operating system. NTFS is an advanced file system designed for use specifically
within the Windows NT operating system. It supports file system recovery,
extremely large storage media, and long filenames. It also supports object-oriented
applications by treating all files as objects with user-defined and system-defined
attributes.
See
also
FAT and FAT32.
NTLM
Abbreviation for Windows NT LAN Manager. NTLM is the security protocol for
the Windows NT operating system.
NuBus
Proprietary expansion bus used on Apple Macintosh personal computers.
NVRAM
Acronym for nonvolatile random-access memory. Memory that does not lose its
contents when you turn off your system. NVRAM is used for maintaining the
date, time, and system configuration information.
OID
Abbreviation for object identifier. An implementation-specific integer or pointer
that uniquely identifies an object.
online access service
A service that typically provides access to the Internet, e-mail, bulletin boards,
chat rooms, and file libraries.
operation
The process of applying a command through the appropriate interface.
Glossary 329
option
An argument to a command that modifies its function rather than providing data
and is usually set off by a delimiter such as
-
or
/
. Some options may or must be
followed by a value, for example:
utilname
-option
=argument
OTP
Abbreviation for one-time programmable.
PAM
Acronym for Pluggable Authentication Modules. PAM allows system
administrators to set an authentication policy without having to recompile
authentication programs.
parallel port
An I/O port used most often to connect a parallel printer to your system. You can
usually identify a parallel port on your system by its 25-hole connector.
parameter
A value or option that you specify to a program. A parameter is sometimes called
a switch or an argument.
partition
You can divide a hard drive into multiple physical sections called partitions with
the
fdisk
command. Each partition can contain multiple logical drives. After
partitioning the hard drive, you must format each logical drive with the format
command.
PC card
A credit-card sized, removable module for portable computers standardized by
PCMCIA. PC Cards are also known as
PCMCIA cards.
PC Cards are 16-bit devices
that are used to attach modems, network adapters, sound cards, radio transceivers,
solid state disks and hard disks to a portable computer. The PC Card is a
plug-and-play device, which is configured automatically by the Card Services
software.
PCI
Abbreviation for Peripheral Component Interconnect. The predominant 32-bit
or 64-bit local-bus standard developed by Intel Corporation.
330 Glossary
PCMCIA
Personal Computer Memory Card International Association. An international
trade association that has developed standards for devices, such as modems and
external hard drives, that can be plugged into portable computers.
PERC
Acronym for PowerEdge
™
Expandable RAID controller.
peripheral device
An internal or external device—such as a printer, a disk drive, or a keyboard—
connected to a system.
PGA
Abbreviation for pin grid array, a type of microprocessor socket that allows you to
remove the microprocessor chip.
physical memory array
The physical memory array is the entire physical memory of a system. Variables for
physical memory array include maximum size, total number of memory slots on
the motherboard, and total number of slots in use.
physical memory array mapped
The physical memory array mapped refers to the way physical memory is divided.
For example, one mapped area may have 640 KB and the other mapped area may
have between 1 MB and 127 MB.
PIC
Acronym for programmable interrupt controller.
PIP
Acronym for peripheral interchange program.
pixel
A single point on a video display. Pixels are arranged in rows and columns to create
an image. A video resolution, such as 640 x 480, is expressed as the number of
pixels across by the number of pixels up and down.
PKCS #7
Abbreviation for Public Key Cryptography Standard #7. PKCS #7 is an RSA Data
Security, Inc., standard for encapsulating signed data such as a certificate chain.
Glossary 331
PKIS
Abbreviation for Novell Public Key Infrastructure Services.
PLCC
Abbreviation for plastic leaded chip carrier.
PEF
Abbreviation for Platform Event Filter.
A PEF is a function that compares an event against a set of configurable event
filters and triggers a selectable action, such as, an alert on a match.
Plug and Play
An industry-standard specification that makes it easier to add hardware devices
to personal computers. Plug and Play provides automatic installation and
configuration, compatibility with existing hardware, and dynamic support of
mobile computing environments.
PME
Abbreviation for Power Management Event. A PME is a pin on a peripheral
component interconnect that allows a PCI device to assert a wake event.
POST
Acronym for power-on self-test. Before the operating system loads when you turn
on your system, the POST tests various system components such as RAM, the
disk drives, and the keyboard.
power supply
An electrical system that converts AC current from the wall outlet into the
DC currents required by the system circuitry. The power supply in a personal
computer typically generates multiple voltages.
power unit
A set of power supplies in a system chassis.
ppm
Abbreviation for pages per minute.
PPP
Short for Point-to-Point Protocol; it is a method of connecting a computer to the
Internet.
332 Glossary
PQFP
Abbreviation for plastic quad flat pack, a type of microprocessor socket in which
the microprocessor chip is permanently mounted.
program diskette set
The set of diskettes from which you can perform a complete installation of an
operating system or application program. When you reconfigure a program, you
often need its program diskette set.
protected mode
An operating mode supported by 80286 or higher microprocessors, protected
mode allows operating systems to implement:
• A memory address space of 16 MB to 4 GB
• Multitasking
• Virtual memory, a method for increasing addressable memory by using the hard
drive
provider
A provider is an extension of a CIM schema that communicates with managed
objects and accesses data and event notifications from a variety of sources.
Providers forward this information to the CIM Object Manager for integration
and interpretation.
PS/2
Abbreviation for Personal System/2.
PXE
Abbreviation for Pre-boot eXecution Environment.
QFP
Abbreviation for quad flat pack.
RAC
Acronym for remote access controller.
RAID
Acronym for redundant array of independent drives.
Glossary 333
RAM
Acronym for random-access memory. A system's primary temporary storage area
for program instructions and data. Each location in RAM is identified by a number
called a memory address. Any information stored in RAM is lost when you turn
off your system.
RAMDAC
Acronym for random-access memory digital-to-analog converter.
RAM disk
A memory-resident program that emulates a hard drive.
RAS
Acronym for remote access service, which is a service provided by some Microsoft
Windows operating systems that allows most of the services that would be
available on a network to be accessed over a modem. The service includes support
for dial-up and logon tasks and presents the same network interface as the normal
network drivers used for the NIC.
RBAC
Abbreviation for role-based access control.
RDRAM
Acronym for Rambus DRAM. A dynamic RAM chip technology from Rambus,
Inc. Direct RDRAMs are used in systems. Direct RDRAM chips are housed in
RIMM modules, which are similar to DIMMs but have different pin settings. The
chips can be built with dual channels, doubling the transfer rate to 3.2 GB/sec.
read-only file
A read-only file is one that you are prohibited from editing or deleting. A file can
have read-only status if:
• Its read-only attribute is enabled.
• It resides on a physically write-protected diskette or on a diskette in a write-
protected drive.
• It is located on a network in a directory to which the system administrator has
assigned read-only rights to you.
334 Glossary
readme file
A text file included with a software package or hardware product that contains
information supplementing or updating the documentation for the software or
hardware. Typically, readme files provide installation information, describe new
product enhancements or corrections that have not yet been documented, and
list known problems or other things you need to be aware of as you use the software
or hardware.
real mode
An operating mode supported by 80286 or higher microprocessors, real mode
imitates the architecture of an 8086 microprocessor.
refresh rate
The rate at which the monitor redraws the video image on the monitor screen.
More precisely, the refresh rate is the frequency, measured in Hz, at which the
screen's horizontal lines are recharged (sometimes also referred to as its vertical
frequency). The higher the refresh rate, the less video flicker can be seen by the
human eye. The higher refresh rates are also noninterlaced.
remote management system
A remote management system is any system that accesses the Server
Administrator home page on a managed system from a remote location using a
supported Web browser.
See
managed system.
RFI
Abbreviation for radio frequency interference.
RGB
Abbreviation for red/green/blue.
RIMM
Acronym for Rambus In-line Memory Module, which is the Rambus equivalent
of a DIMM module.
ROM
Acronym for read-only memory. Your system contains some programs essential
to its operation in ROM code. Unlike RAM, a ROM chip retains its contents even
after you turn off your system. Examples of code in ROM include the program
that initiates your system's boot routine and the POST.
Glossary 335
rpm
Abbreviation for revolutions per minute.
RPM
Abbreviation for RPM Package Manager.
RSA
Abbreviation for Rivest, Shamir, and Adleman, the inventors of a public key
encryption technology developed by RSA Data Security, Inc.
RTC
Abbreviation for real-time clock. Battery-powered clock circuitry inside the system
that keeps the date and time after you turn off the system.
SAN
Acronym for storage area network.
SAS
Acronym for Secure Authentication Services.
SATA
Abbreviation for Serial Advanced Technology Attachment.
SCA
Abbreviation for single connector attachment.
schema
A collection of class definitions that describes managed objects in a particular
environment. A CIM schema is a collection of class definitions used to represent
managed objects that are common to every management environment, which is
why CIM is called the Common Information Model.
SCSI
Acronym for small computer system interface. An I/O bus interface with faster
data transmission rates than standard ports. You can connect up to seven devices
(15 for some newer SCSI types) to one SCSI interface.
336 Glossary
SEL
Acronym for system event log.
The system event log is a time-stamped nonvolatile record of the most recent
platform events that have been logged in the shelf.
SDMS
Abbreviation for SCSI device management system.
sec
Abbreviation for second(s).
SEC
Abbreviation for single-edge contact.
secure port server
An application that makes Web pages available for viewing by Web browsers using
the HTTPS protocol.
See
Web server.
serial port
An I/O port used most often to connect a modem to your system. You can usually
identify a serial port on your system by its 9-pin connector.
settings
Settings are conditions of a manageable object help to determine what happens when
a certain value is detected in a component. For example, a user can set the upper
critical threshold of a temperature probe to 75 degrees Celsius. If the probe reaches
that temperature, the setting results in an alert being sent to the management system
so that user intervention can be taken. Some settings, when reached, can trigger a
system shutdown or other response that can prevent damage to the system.
server module
A modular system component that functions as an individual system. To function
as a system, a server module is inserted into a chassis which includes power
supplies, fans, a system management module, and at least one network switch
module. The power supplies, fans, system management module, and network
switch module are shared resources of the server modules in the chassis.
See
modular system.
service tag number
A bar code label that identifies each system in the event that you need to call for
customer or technical support.
Glossary 337
SGRAM
Acronym for synchronous graphics RAM.
shadowing
A computer's system and video BIOS code is usually stored on ROM chips.
Shadowing refers to the performance-enhancement technique that copies BIOS
code to faster RAM chips in the upper memory area (above 640 KB) during the
boot routine.
SIMD
Abbreviation for Single Instruction Multiple Data.
SIMM
Acronym for single in-line memory module. A small circuit board containing
DRAM chips that connects to the system board.
SIP
Acronym for single in-line package, which is a type of housing for electronic
components in which the connecting pins protrude from one side. A SIP is also
called a Single In-line Pin Package (SIPP).
SKU
Acronym for stock keeping unit.
SMART
Acronym for Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology. A technology
that allows hard drives to report errors and failures to the system BIOS, which
then displays an error message on the screen. To take advantage of this technology,
you must have a SMART-compliant hard drive and the proper support in the
system BIOS.
SMBIOS
Acronym for system management BIOS.
SMD
Abbreviation for surface mount device.
SMTP
Abbreviation for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol.
338 Glossary
SNMP
Abbreviation for Simple Network Management Protocol. SNMP, a popular
network control and monitoring protocol, is part of the original TCP/IP protocol
suite. SNMP provides the format in which vital information about different
network devices, such as network servers or routers, can be sent to a management
application.
SNMP trap
A notification (event) generated by the RAC or ESM that contains information
about state changes on the managed system or about potential hardware problems.
SODIMM
Acronym for small outline-DIMM. A DIMM module with a thinner profile due
to the use of TSOP chip packages. SODIMMs are commonly used in
portable computers.
SOIC
Abbreviation for Small Outline IC, a small-dimension, plastic, rectangular,
surface mount chip package that uses gull-wing pins extending outward.
SOJ
Abbreviation for small outline package J-lead, a small-dimension, plastic,
rectangular surface mount chip package with j-shaped pins on its two long sides.
SOL
Abbreviation for Serial Over LAN. SOL enables suitably designed servers to
transparently redirect the serial character stream of a baseboard UART to/from a
remote client over a shared LAN. The architecture requires software running on
the managed system's BMC and client software running on a management station
and/or a central network proxy.
SRAM
Abbreviation for static random-access memory. Because SRAM chips do not require
continual refreshing, they are substantially faster than DRAM chips.
SSH
Abbreviation for Secure Shell.
SSH is a program that may be used to log into another system over a network, to
execute commands in a remote system, and to move files from one system to
another. It provides strong authentication and secure communication over
insecure channels.
Glossary 339
SSL
Abbreviation for secure socket layer.
state
Refers to the condition of an object that can have more than one condition. For
example, an object may be in the
not ready
state.
status
Refers to the health or functioning of an object. For example, a temperature probe
can have the status normal if the probe is measuring acceptable temperatures.
When the probe begins reading temperatures that exceed limits set by the user,
it reports a critical status.
support commands
Commands that specify how an action should be performed.
SVGA
Abbreviation for super video graphics array. VGA and SVGA are video standards
for video adapters with greater resolution and color display capabilities than
previous standards.
To display a program at a specific resolution, you must install the appropriate
video drivers and your monitor must support the resolution. Similarly, the number
of colors that a program can display depends on the capabilities of the monitor,
the video driver, and the amount of video memory installed in the system.
switch
On a system board, switches control various circuits or functions in your computer
system. These switches are known as DIP switches; they are normally packaged
in groups of two or more switches in a plastic case. Two common DIP switches
are used on system boards: slide switches and rocker switches. The names of the
switches are based on how the settings (on and off) of the switches are changed.
syntax
The rules that dictate how you must type a command or instruction so that the
system understands it. A variable's syntax indicates its data type.
340 Glossary
system board
As the main circuit board, the system board usually contains most of your system's
integral components, such as the following:
• Microprocessor
•RAM
• Controllers for standard peripheral devices, such as the keyboard
• Various ROM chips
Frequently used synonyms for system board are motherboard and logic board.
system configuration information
Data stored in memory that tells a system what hardware is installed and how the
system should be configured for operation.
system diskette
System diskette is a synonym for bootable diskette.
system memory
System memory is a synonym for RAM.
System Setup program
A BIOS-based program that allows you to configure your system's hardware and
customize the system's operation by setting such features as password protection
and energy management. Some options in the System Setup program require that
you reboot the system (or the system may reboot automatically) in order to make
a hardware configuration change. Because the System Setup program is stored in
NVRAM, any settings remain in effect until you change them again.
system.ini file
A start-up file for the Windows operating system. When you start Windows, it
consults the
system.ini
file to determine a variety of options for the
Windows operating environment. Among other things, the
system.ini
file records
which video, mouse, and keyboard drivers are installed for Windows.
Running the Control Panel or Windows Setup program may change options in
the
system.ini
file. On other occasions, you may need to change or add options
to the
system.ini
file manually with a text editor, such as Notepad.
table
In SNMP MIBs, a table is a two dimensional array that describes the variables
that make up a managed object.
Glossary 341
TAP
Abbreviation for Telelocator Alphanumeric Protocol, which is a protocol used for
submitting requests to a pager service.
TCP/IP
Abbreviation for Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. A system for
transferring information over a computer network containing dissimilar systems,
such as systems running Windows and UNIX
®
.
termination
Some devices (such as the last device at each end of a SCSI cable) must be
terminated to prevent reflections and spurious signals in the cable. When such
devices are connected in a series, you may need to enable or disable the
termination on these devices by changing jumper or switch settings on the devices
or by changing settings in the configuration software for the devices.
text editor
An application program for editing text files consisting exclusively of ASCII
characters. Windows Notepad is a text editor, for example. Most word processors
use proprietary file formats containing binary characters, although some can read
and write text files.
TFTP
Abbreviation for Trivial File Transfer Protocol. TFTP is a version of the TCP/IP
FTP protocol that has no directory or password capability.
text mode
A video mode that can be defined as x columns by y rows of characters.
threshold values
Systems are normally equipped with various sensors that monitor temperature,
voltage, current, and fan speed. The sensor's threshold values specify the ranges
(min and max values) for determining whether the sensor is operating under
normal, noncritical, critical or fatal conditions. Server Administrator-supported
threshold values are
• UpperThresholdFatal
• UpperThresholdCritical
• UpperThresholdNon-critical
• Normal
• LowerThresholdNon-critical
342 Glossary
• LowerThresholdCritical
• LowerThresholdFatal
time-out
A specified period of system inactivity that must occur before an energy
conservation feature is activated.
tpi
Abbreviation for tracks per inch.
TQFP
Abbreviation for thin quad flat pack.
TSR
Abbreviation for terminate-and-stay-resident. A TSR program runs in the
background. Most TSR programs implement a pre-defined key combination
(sometimes referred to as a hot key) that allows you to activate the TSR program's
interface while running another program. When you finish using the TSR
program, you can return to the other application program and leave the TSR
program resident in memory for later use. TSR programs can sometimes cause
memory conflicts. When troubleshooting, rule out the possibility of such a
conflict by rebooting your system without starting any TSR programs.
TSOP
Abbreviation for thin small outline package. A very thin, plastic, rectangular
surface mount chip package with gull-wing pins on its two short sides.
UART
Acronym for universal asynchronous receiver transmitter, the electronic circuit that
makes up the serial port.
UDP
Abbreviation for user datagram protocol.
UL
Abbreviation for Underwriters Laboratories.
UMB
Abbreviation for upper memory blocks.
Glossary 343
unicode
A fixed width, 16-bit world wide character encoding, developed and maintained
by the Unicode Consortium.
UPS
Abbreviation for uninterruptible power supply. A battery-powered unit that
automatically supplies power to your system in the event of an electrical failure.
URL
Abbreviation for Uniform Resource Locator (formerly Universal Resource
Locator).
USB
Abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. A USB connector provides a single
connection point for multiple USB-compliant devices, such as mice, keyboards,
printers, and computer speakers. USB devices can also be connected and
disconnected while the system is running.
utility
A program used to manage system resources—memory, disk drives, or printers, for
example.
utility partition
A bootable partition on the hard drive that provides utilities and diagnostics for
your hardware and software. When activated, the partition boots and provides an
executable environment for the partition's utilities.
UTC
Abbreviation for Universal Coordinated Time.
See
GMT.
UTP
Abbreviation for unshielded twisted pair.
UUID
Abbreviation for Universal Unique Identification.
V
Abbreviation for volt(s).
VAC
Abbreviation for volt(s) alternating current.
344 Glossary
Validation
Process of checking a command.
varbind
An algorithm used to assign an object identifier (OID). The varbind gives rules
for arriving at the decimal prefix that uniquely identifies an enterprise, as well as
the formula for specifying a unique identifier for the objects defined in that
enterprise's MIB.
variable
A component of a managed object. A temperature probe, for example, has a variable
to describe its capabilities, its health or status, and certain indexes that you can
use to help you in locating the right temperature probe.
VCCI
Abbreviation for Voluntary Control Council for Interference.
VDC
Abbreviation for volt(s) direct current.
VGA
Abbreviation for video graphics array. VGA and SVGA are video standards for
video adapters with greater resolution and color display capabilities than previous
standards. To display a program at a specific resolution, you must install the
appropriate video drivers and your monitor must support the resolution. Similarly,
the number of colors that a program can display depends on the capabilities of
the monitor, the video driver, and the amount of video memory installed for the
video adapter.
VGA feature connector
On some systems with a built-in VGA video adapter, a VGA feature connector
allows you to add an enhancement adapter, such as a video accelerator, to your
system. A VGA feature connector can also be called a VGA pass-through
connector.
Glossary 345
video adapter
The logical circuitry that provides—in combination with the monitor—your
system's video capabilities. A video adapter may support more or fewer features
than a specific monitor offers. Typically, a video adapter comes with video drivers
for displaying popular application programs and operating systems in a variety of
video modes.
On some systems, a video adapter is integrated into the system board. Also
available are many video adapter cards that plug into an expansion-card
connector.
Video adapters often include memory separate from RAM on the system board.
The amount of video memory, along with the adapter's video drivers, may affect
the number of colors that can be simultaneously displayed. Video adapters can
also include their own coprocessor for faster graphics rendering.
video driver
A program that allows graphics-mode application programs and operating systems
to display at a chosen resolution with the desired number of colors. A software
package may include some generic video drivers. Any additional video drivers may
need to match the video adapter installed in the system.
video memory
Most VGA and SVGA video adapters include memory chips in addition to your
system's RAM. The amount of video memory installed primarily influences the
number of colors that a program can display (with the appropriate video drivers
and monitor capabilities).
video mode
Video adapters normally support multiple text and graphics display modes.
Character-based software displays in text modes that can be defined as
x
columns
by
y
rows of characters. Graphics-based software displays in graphics modes that
can be defined as
x
horizontal by
y
vertical pixels by
z
colors.
video resolution
Video resolution—800 x 600, for example—is expressed as the number of pixels
across by the number of pixels up and down. To display a program at a specific
graphics resolution, you must install the appropriate video drivers and your
monitor must support the resolution.
346 Glossary
virtual memory
A method for increasing addressable RAM by using the hard drive. For example,
in a system with 16 MB of RAM and 16 MB of virtual memory set up on the hard
drive, the operating system would manage the system as though it had 32 MB of
physical RAM.
virus
A self-starting program designed to inconvenience you. Virus programs have been
known to corrupt the files stored on a hard drive or to replicate themselves until
a computer system or network runs out of memory. The most common way that
virus programs move from one system to another is by infected diskettes, from
which they copy themselves to the hard drive. To guard against virus programs,
you should do the following:
• Periodically run a virus-checking utility on your system's hard drive
• Always run a virus-checking utility on any diskettes (including commercially sold
software) before using them
VLSI
Abbreviation for very-large-scale integration.
VLVESA
Acronym for very low voltage enterprise system architecture.
VNC
Abbreviation for virtual network computing.
vpp
Abbreviation for peak-point voltage.
VRAM
Acronym for video random-access memory. Some video adapters use VRAM chips
(or a combination of VRAM and DRAM) to improve video performance. VRAM
is dual-ported, allowing the video adapter to update the screen and receive new
image data at the same time.
VT-100
Abbreviation for Video Terminal 100, which is used by the most common terminal
emulation programs.
Glossary 347
W
Abbreviation for watt(s).
Wakeup on LAN
The ability for the power in a client station to be turned on by the network. Remote
wake-up enables software upgrading and other management tasks to be performed
on users' machines after the work day is over. It also enables remote users to gain
access to machines that have been turned off. Intel calls remote wake-up
Wake-on-
LAN
.
WAN
Abbreviation for wide area network.
Web server
An application that makes Web pages available for viewing by Web browsers using
the HTTP protocol.
WH
Abbreviation for watt-hour(s).
winbom.ini file
Winbom.ini
provides a bill-of-materials to guide the installation and
configuration process.
Winbom.ini
is used in different ways throughout the
preinstallation and manufacturing process.You can start a computer using
Windows PE as the operating system, and run the command factory -winpe to
preinstall Windows from a configuration set specified in the
Winbom.ini
file.
win.ini file
A start-up file for the Windows operating system. When you start Windows, it
consults the
win.ini
file to determine a variety of options for the Windows
operating environment. Among other things, the
win.ini
file records what
printer(s) and fonts are installed for Windows. The
win.ini
file also usually
includes sections that contain optional settings for Windows application
programs that are installed on the hard drive. Running the Control Panel or
Windows Setup program may change options in the
win.ini
file. On other
occasions, you may need to change or add options to the
win.ini
file manually
with a text editor such as Notepad.
348 Glossary
Windows 95
An integrated and complete Microsoft Windows operating system that does not
require MS-DOS and that provides advanced operating system performance,
improved ease of use, enhanced workgroup functionality, and simplified file
management and browsing.
Windows NT
High-performance server and workstation operating system software developed by
Microsoft that is intended for technical, engineering, and financial applications.
write-protected
Read-only files are said to be write-protected. You can write-protect a 3.5-inch
diskette by sliding its write-protect tab to the open position or by setting the
write-protect feature in the System Setup program.
X.509 Certificate
An X.509 certificate binds a public encryption key to the identity or other attribute
of its principal. Principals can be people, application code (such as a signed applet)
or any other uniquely identified entity (such as a secure port server or Web server).
XMM
Abbreviation for extended memory manager, a utility that allows application
programs and operating systems to use extended memory in accordance with the
XMS.
XMS
Abbreviation for eXtended Memory Specification.
X Windows system
The graphical user interface used in the Red Hat Enterprise Linux environment.
ZIF
Acronym for zero insertion force. Some systems use ZIF sockets and connectors
to allow devices such as the microprocessor chip to be installed or removed with
no stress applied to the device.
ZIP
A 3.5-inch removable disk drive from Iomega. Originally, it provided 100-MB
removable cartridges. The drive is bundled with software that can catalog the
disks and lock the files for security. A 250-MB version of the Zip drive also reads
and writes the 100-MB Zip cartridges.
Index 349
Index
D
disk partitioning
UPINIT, 175
disk partitioning utilities, 11
disk partitioning utility, 11
DTK utilities
overview, 10
E
error codes, 213
error messages, 19, 213
F
features
RACADM, 183
RAIDCFG, 125
SYSCFG, 21
UPINIT, 175
M
messages and codes, 213
O
options
RACADM, 184
options and arguments
RAIDCFG, 126
UPINIT, 176
overview
DTK utilities, 10
R
RAC configuration utilities
RACADM, 11
RAC configuration utility, 11
RACADM, 183
features, 183
options, subcommands, and
arguments, 188
RACADM subcommands
config/getconfig, 191
getssninfo, 199
getsysinfo, 201
help, 206
racdump, 206
racreset, 207
racresetcfg, 209
setrac, 210
350 Index
RAID configuration utilities, 10
RAID configuration utility
RAIDCFG, 10
RAIDCFG, 125
error codes and messages, 225
features, 125
options and arguments, 126, 132
supported RAID controllers, 125,
175, 183
replication, 11
requirements, 10
S
SYSCFG, 21
error checking and messages, 213
features, 21
options and arguments, 27
system configuration and update
utilities, 10
SYSCFG, 10
U
UPINIT, 175
creating a partition, 175
features, 175
options and arguments, 176
utility, 175
utilities
disk partitioning, 11
RAC configuration, 11
RACADM, 11, 183
RAIDCFG, 10, 125
SYSCFG, 10, 21
UPINIT, 175
utility
UPINIT, 175
utility types
RAID configuration, 10
system configuration and
update, 10
W
what’s new, 9

Navigation menu